Guardshield Safety Light Curtain: User Manual

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 192

GuardShield Safety Light

Curtain
Catalog Numbers 450L-B4FNxYD, 450L-B4HNxYD,
450L-E4AxLxYD, 450L-E4FLxYD, 450L-E4HLxYD

User Manual Original Instructions


GuardShield Safety Light Curtain User Manual

Important User Information


Read this document and the documents listed in the additional resources section about installation, configuration, and
operation of this equipment before you install, configure, operate, or maintain this product. Users are required to familiarize
themselves with installation and wiring instructions in addition to requirements of all applicable codes, laws, and standards.

Activities including installation, adjustments, putting into service, use, assembly, disassembly, and maintenance are required to
be carried out by suitably trained personnel in accordance with applicable code of practice.

If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be
impaired.

In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use
or application of this equipment.

The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and
requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or liability for
actual use based on the examples and diagrams.

No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software
described in this manual.

Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation, Inc., is
prohibited.

Throughout this manual, when necessary, we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations.

WARNING: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment,
which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.

ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property
damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and recognize the consequence.

IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.

These labels may also be on or inside the equipment to provide specific precautions.

SHOCK HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that dangerous
voltage may be present.

BURN HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that surfaces may
reach dangerous temperatures.

ARC FLASH HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a motor control center, to alert people to
potential Arc Flash. Arc Flash will cause severe injury or death. Wear proper Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Follow ALL
Regulatory requirements for safe work practices and for Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).

The following icon may appear in the text of this document.

Identifies information that is useful and can help to make a process easier to do or easier to understand.

2 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Table of Contents

Preface
Who Should Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Summary of Changes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Terminology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Additional Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Chapter 1
Product Overview General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Package Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Firmware Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Chapter 2
Safety Concepts Safety Standards Applied to GuardShield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Functional Safety Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Safety Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Possible Misuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Chapter 3
Operation Principle of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Laser Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Chapter 4
Safety Function Start Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Automatic Start/Restart (Default) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Manual Start/Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Manual Cold Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Manual Start/Restart with Off Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Power Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
External Device Monitoring (EDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Low Operating Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Beam Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Interference Rejection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Blanking and Reduced Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Teach-in Fixed Blanking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Teach-in Blanking Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Configuration Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Reduced Resolution (Object Number Limited) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Resolution with Blanking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Muting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Muting Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Muting Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Mute Dependent Override Function (MDO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Two-sensor T-type Muting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 3


Table of Contents

Two-sensor L-type Muting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38


Two-sensor T-type Muting with Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Four-sensor Muting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Cascading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Cascading and Blanking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Response Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Standard Response Time, Ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Advanced Feature Response Time, Ta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Multiple Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Short Interruption Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Cascading Response Time, Tc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Connected Components Workbench Response Time. . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Product Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Chapter 5
System Configuration Receiver Plug-in DIP Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
450L-APR-ON-5 Connection Plug-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
450L-APR-ED-8 Connection Plug-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
450L-APR-BL-5 Connection Plug-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
450L-APR-MU-8 Connection Plug-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
450L-APR-UN-8 Connection Plug-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Confirmation of a New System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Confirmation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Confirmation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Chapter 6
Installation and Wiring Determine the Safety Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
U.S. Safety Distance Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
OSHA Safety Distance Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
ANSI Safety Distance Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
European Safety Distance Formula. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Minimum Distance from Reflective Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Install and Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Correct Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Incorrect Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Mount Multiple 450L GuardShield Safety Light Curtains . . . . . . . . 72
450L Safety Light Curtain with Interference Rejection . . . . . . . . . . 76
Mounting Brackets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Standard Top/Bottom Mounting Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Side Mounting Bracket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Shock Mounting Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Replacement Mounting Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Electrical Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Plug-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Plug-in Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Transmitter Plug-in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Receiver Plug-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Cascading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
4 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024
Table of Contents

Transmitter Cable Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87


Receiver Cable Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Cascading Cable Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
External Device Monitoring (EDM) Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Restart Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
OSSD Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
OSSD Signal Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
OSSD Restart Time (from Off to On) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Test Pulses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Typical Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Direct to Contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Guardmaster SI Safety Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
T-connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
GuardLink Tap Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
1732 ArmorBlock Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Two-sensor Muting with Muting Plug-in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Four-sensor Muting with Muting Plug-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Chapter 7
Status Indicators and Status Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Troubleshooting System Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Status Indicator for Normal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Optical Push Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Troubleshoot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Status Indicator Error Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Optical Interface Device (OID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Troubleshoot with Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Chapter 8
Safety Instructions Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Regular Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Verify 450L PAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Clean Optic Front Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Product Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Stick Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Plug-in Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Chapter 9
Connected Components Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Workbench Software Multiple Subconfigurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Start a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Workbench Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Project Organizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 5


Table of Contents

DIP Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120


USB Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Subconfigurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
General Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
GPIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Diagnose Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Teach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Laser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Beam Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Two-sensor Muting Schematic Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Muting Type and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
GPIO Selection and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Four-sensor Muting Schematic Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Muting Type and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
GPIO Selection and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Blanking Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Lens Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Zones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Fixed Blanking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Fixed Blanking Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Teach Blanking Zones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Process Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Floating Blanking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Floating Blanking Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Object Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Reduced Resolution Blanking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Reduced Resolution Blanking Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Object Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Download and Upload Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Change Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Share Your Project (Export/Import). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Export Project to an Archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Import Project from an Archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Export Device to a Zip File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Import a Zip File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Update Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Appendix A
Specifications Safety Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Operating Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

6 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Table of Contents

Inputs Receiver, Cascading, and Universal Plug-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166


Safety Outputs (OSSDs): Receiver Plug-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Status Outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Environmental and General Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Electrical Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
CE Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
UKCA Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Approximate Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Sticks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
450L PAC Catalog Number Explanation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Plug-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Optional Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Corner Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Mounting Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Alignment Tool and Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Weld Shields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Appendix B
Typical Installations Safety Light Curtain Mounted Vertically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Safety Light Curtain Mounted Horizontally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Fixed Blanking Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Cascading Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 7


Table of Contents

Notes:

8 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Preface

This manual describes how to install, wire, and troubleshoot the 450L-B and
450L-E POC and the 450L GuardShield™ PAC Safety Light Curtains.

Who Should Use This Use this manual if you design, install, program, or troubleshoot systems that
Manual use the 450L GuardShield safety light curtain.

You must have a basic understanding of electrical circuitry and familiarity


with safety-related systems. Obtain the proper training before using this
product.

Qualified personnel must perform the following tasks:


• Conduct all inspections.
• Undergo the appropriate technical training.
• Instruct personnel in the operation of the machine and the current safety
guidelines.
• Read and have access to the user manual.
• Install the safety light curtain and only use the safety light curtain on that
specific machine.

Summary of Changes
Topic Page
Updated Additional Resources 10
Updated Table 70 92
Updated Table 72 94
Updated Vibration resistance and Shock 167
Updated Certifications, CE Conformity, and UKCA Conformity 169

Terminology
Abbreviation Definition
EDM External Device Monitoring
ESPE Electro-sensitive Protective Equipment
FSD Final Switching Device
NC Not Connected
NEC National Electric Code (U.S.)
OID Optical Interface Device
Output Signal Switching Device: Typically designates a pair of solid-state signals that are pulled
OSSD up to the DC source supply. The signals are tested for short circuits to the DC power supply, short
circuits to the DC common, and short circuits between the two signals.
Perimeter Access Control: A safety light curtain that is designed for whole body detection to
PAC create a safety perimeter around a machine.
Point of Operation Control: A safety light curtain that is designed for installation close to the
hazard where personnel could frequently interact with the machine as part of the process. These
POC safety light curtains are therefore designed for partial body detection. The 450L safety light
curtain family offers finger and hand detection.
PL Performance Level
QD Quick Disconnect
RB Restart Button
Rx Receiver
SIL Safety Integrity Level
Tx Transmitter

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 9


Preface

Additional Resources These documents contain additional information concerning related products
from Rockwell Automation.
Resource Description
450L GuardShield Safety Light Curtain Quick Start, Provides a quick start information to configure and run a
publication 450L-QS001 system using 450L safety light curtains.
GuardShield 450L-B Safety Light Curtain Package Provides installation information for 450L safety light
Content, publication 450L-PC001 curtain replacement units.
450L GuardShield Light-Curtain Weld-Shield Provides installation information for weld shield kits.
Installation Instructions, publication 450L-IN001
Side Mount Bracket Set for GuardShield Light Curtains Provides installation information for side mount brackets.
Installation Instructions, publication 450L-IN002
GuardShield Light Curtain Optical Interface Device Provides installation information for the optical interface
Installation Instructions, publication 450L-IN003 device.
GuardShield Safety Light Curtain Installation Provides installation information for 450L-B and 450L-E
Instructions, publication 450L-IN004 POC safety light curtains.
GuardShield Muting Distribution Block Installation Provides installation information for the 450L muting
Instructions, publication 450L-IN005 distribution block.
GuardShield Safety Light Curtain Status Light Provides installation information for the 450L status light.
Installation Instructions, publication 450L-IN007
GuardShield 450L PAC Safety Light Curtain Provides installation information for the 450L PAC safety
Installation Instructions, publication 450L-IN009 light curtains.
Safety Book 5, Safety-related Control Systems for Provides principles, standards, and implementation of
Machinery, publication SAFEBK-RM002 safety-related control systems for machinery.
Provides implementation information for the CIP Security™
CIP Security with Rockwell Automation Products standard in your industrial automation control system
Application Technique, publication SECURE-AT001 (IACS).
FactoryTalk Security Application Technique, Provides guidelines for how to configure and use
publication SECURE-AT002 FactoryTalk® Security in an Integrated Architect system.
Provides guidelines for how to use Rockwell Automation®
System Security Design Guidelines Reference Manual, products to improve the security of your industrial
publication SECURE-RM001 automation system.
Configure System Security Features User Manual, Describes the system-level configuration requirements to
publication SECURE-UM001 use a ControlLogix® 5580 controller.
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Provides general guidelines for installing a
Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1 Rockwell Automation industrial system.
Product Certifications website: Provides declarations of conformity, certificates, and other
rok.auto/certifications certification details.

You can view or download publications at rok.auto/literature.

10 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 1

Product Overview

General Description The 450L GuardShield™ safety light curtain family consists of general-purpose
presence sensing devices that are designed for use on hazardous machinery
for both Perimeter Access Control (PAC) and Point of Operation Control (POC)
applications. The product family is certified as Type 4 electro-sensitive
protective equipment (ESPE) (as defined by EN 61496-1 and IEC 61496-2). This
certification allows you to use this product in applications that require PLe
category 4 according to EN ISO 13849-1.

The 450L PAC safety light curtains are based on the 450L-E POC safety light
curtain models and are offered in single-beam (Area Access Control [AAC]),
2-beam, 3-beam, and 4-beam options and range in length 150…1050 mm
(5.91…41.34 in.).

The 450L POC safety light curtains are offered in multiple lengths
150…1950 mm (5.9…76.77 in.) in increments of 150 mm (5.9 in.). Each length is
available in finger [14 mm (0.56 in.)] or hand [30 mm (1.19 in.)] resolution with a
basic set of sensing functions.

The 450L POC safety light curtain family consists of two product lines:
• 450L-B (basic)
• 450L-E (enhanced)

The 450L-B safety light curtain is suitable for basic on/off applications,
whereas the 450L-E safety light curtain provides enhanced features for more
sophisticated applications. Table 1 shows the differences between the two
product versions.
Table 1 - 450L-B and 450L-E/450L PAC Safety Light Curtain System Comparison
Description 450L-B 450L-E and 450L PAC
Two zone indicator light-emitting Integrated laser alignment and two zone indicator
Alignment aid diode (LED) LED
Operation range finger
resolution, min…max 0.5…4 m (1.6…13.12 ft) 0.5…9.0 m (1.64…29.53 ft)(1)
Operation range hand 0.9…7.0 m (2.95…22.97 ft) 0.9…16.2 m (2.95…53.15 ft)
resolution, min…max
Start modes
EDM
Start modes Operation range
Functionality External device monitoring (EDM) Beam coding
Operation range Blanking(2)
Muting
Cascading
CIP Safety™
Yes Yes
functionality(3)
(1) Not applicable for 450L PAC safety light curtain models, which is based on 450L-E safety light curtain hand resolution.
(2) Blanking is not available on 450L PAC safety light curtain models.
(3) Only with appropriate plug-in and module. CIP safety is not available on 450L PAC models.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 11


Chapter 1 Product Overview

The two 450L safety light curtain versions have no differences in cross section,
protective heights, resolutions, sealing, operating/storage temperature, length
passive zones at the ends of each stick, or mounting options. The 450L PAC
safety light curtain also has the same cross section, sealing, operating/storage
temperatures, and mounting options.

The GuardShield safety light curtain system is unique from other safety light
curtain transmitter and receiver solutions because the system consists of two
identical transceiver sticks. These safety light curtains are not designated as
transmitter or receiver right out-of-the-box. The configuration of a stick as a
transmitter or a receiver is done by inserting either:
• A dedicated transmitter or receiver plug-in into the transceiver sticks.
• A universal plug-in module in each transceiver stick, which allows a
selection for the transmitter or the receiver function by wiring.
The GuardShield 450L POC safety light curtain is a two-box system, which has
no inactive sensing area or dead/blind zones at the top and bottom of each
stick. This design allows an easy integration in individual machine designs.

The GuardShield 450L PAC safety light curtain is also a two-box system. PAC
systems have several single-beam light barriers, or, for 450L PAC safety light
curtains, a combination of active and passive elements in accordance with
EN ISO 13855 [2010].
Figure 1 - 450L PAC Front View - Active and Passive Zones (2-beam Model Shown)

Figure 2 - 450L PAC Beam Heights


4th beam
Distance to reference plane (for example, ground)

3rd beam

2nd beam 3rd beam

1st beam
2nd beam
2nd beam

1st beam
1st beam 1st beam

Selectable function depends on the installed receiver plug-in, which you can
insert in a GuardShield safety light curtain transceiver stick. Select different
operation modes via the DIP switch on the receiver plug-ins.

12 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 1 Product Overview

Depending on the type of plug-in that you install in a GuardShield stick, the
system offers:
• Connectivity to ArmorBlock® Guard I/O™ (5-pin M12 QD) for network
connectivity, providing CIP Safety over DeviceNet® or EtherNet/IP™ (not
applicable for 450L PAC safety light curtains).
• Auto or Manual Start modes.
• External device monitoring (EDM).
• Beam coding.
• Muting, blanking, and cascading capabilities (450L-E safety light curtain
only).

LASER LIGHT CLASS 2 HAZARD: Do not stare into the beam. The 450L-E
safety light curtains have an integrated laser alignment help option (see Laser
Alignment on page 23).

We apply recognized technical regulations and ISO 9001 quality assurance


procedures in the development and production of Allen-Bradley® GuardShield
products.

IMPORTANT A 450L-B safety light curtain transceiver stick cannot operate with a A
450L-E safety light curtain transceiver stick. A 450L PAC safety light
curtain transceiver stick cannot operate with a 450L POC safety light
curtain transceiver stick of either kind.

Figure 3 - Compatibility Limitations


2 x 450L-B 2 x 450L-E 2 x 450L PAC
1 x 450L-B 1 x 450L PAC
1 x 450L-E 1 x 450L POC

Figure 4 - Assembly Overview (450L-B Safety Light Curtain System)


Connection
Plug-in

Standard
Mounting Inserted Connection
Bracket Plug-ins

Transceiver
Sticks

Inserted Plug-ins

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 13


Chapter 1 Product Overview

Figure 5 - Assembly Overview (450L PAC and 450L-E POC Safety Light Curtain System)
Standard Mounting
Bracket
Cascading Plug-in
(Optional)

450L-E Transceiver
Sticks

Connection Plug-in

Inserted Connection
Plug-ins

The 450L-E and 450L PAC safety light curtain also provide the option to insert a
cascading plug-in into the opposite stick end at the gray slot cover (see
Cascading on page 43 and Figure 7 on page 15).

Package Contents A GuardShield safety light curtain is normally shipped as an individual


component (single transceiver). A functional system includes four individual
boxes.
Table 2 - List for a Complete System
Item Required Quantity Description Remark
Each box contains:
450L GuardShield • One stick
1 2 safety light curtain • Mounting kit (top and bottom)
transceiver stick • Test rod
• Short instruction manual
2 1 Transmitter plug-in 150 mm (5.9 in.) pigtail with M12 QD connector (plug)
3 1 Receiver plug-in 150 mm (5.9 in.) pigtail with M12 QD connector (plug)

Figure 6 - Contents of 450L POC Safety Light Curtain Transceiver Stick Box

Test Rod

Standard Mounting Kit Installation


Transceiver Stick Instruction

14 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 1 Product Overview

Figure 7 - Plug-ins

Receiver and Universal Connection


Plug-in, with DIP Switches, 5-pin or
8-pin M12 QD

Cascading Plug-in (Catalog


Number 450L-APC-IO-8), No
DIP Switches, 8-pin M12 QD

Transmitter Connection Plug-in,


No DIP Switches, 5-pin or 8-pin M12 QD

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 15


Chapter 1 Product Overview

Firmware Revisions The feature list of the 450L-B and of the 450L-E safety light curtains
continuously expands. Table 3 lists the components with firmware that you
can upgrade with ControlFLASH™ software.
Table 3 - Firmware Revisions of 450L Safety Light Curtains
Family Version Description
Initial Release. Does not support Connected Components Workbench™
1.001 software.
Support Connected Components Workbench software diagnosis and
2.001 connection with T-connector. Can be used as the last pair of cascading.
Same feature as 2.001 but 4K security key. Engineering version only - not
3.001 released to users.
450L-B
4.001 Support Connected Components Workbench software diagnosis.
5.001 Same feature as 4.001 4K security key.
5.002 Initial release to support CIP Safety functionality.
5.003 Engineering version only - not released to users.
5.004 Introduction of interference rejection option.
Initial release and supports Connected Components Workbench software
diagnosis. Supports Safety Override, Dry Contact Switch, and E-stop.
2.001 Cascaded safety light curtains Tx side cannot use universal plug-in, the host
pairs can still use universal plug-in.
3.001 Same feature as 2.001. Engineering version only - not released to users.
450L-E Support Connected Components Workbench software diagnosis and
4.001 configuration. Not backward compatible with 450L-APC-IO-8.
5.001 Same feature as 4.001 4K security key.
5.002 Initial release to support CIP Safety functionality.
5.003 Engineering version only - not released to users.
5.004 Introduction of interference rejection option.
Initial Release. Does not support Connected Components Workbench
450L PAC 1.001 software, or Studio 5000® (CIP Safety).
1.001 Initial Release.
2.001 Allows 450L-APU-UN-8 to be used as a transmitter in a cascaded stick.
450L-APC-IO-8 3.001 Same feature as 2.001.
4.001 Backward compatible with LC.
5.001 Same feature as 4.001 4K security key.
Initial release, does not support the 450L-E safety light curtain. Upgrade to
1.002 or later if you receive the warning message:
1.001 The connection to the 450L safety light curtain will be terminated because of
repeatedly mismatched checksum calculation errors.
1.002 Supports LC diagnosis and firmware update.
450L-OID Backward compatible with LC. Supports LC firmware 3.001 diagnosis,
3.001 firmware update, reset, confirm, and blanking teach command. Added 4K key
certificate support.
Backward compatible with LC. Example: 2.001, 3.001, 4.001 LC can work with
4.001 5.001 OID, but 3.001, 4.001 OID cannot work with 5.001 LC.
5.001 Backward compatible with LC 4K security key.

For maintenance reasons, a 450L safety light curtain stick with an old
firmware revision can operate with a 450L safety light curtain stick with newer
firmware.

16 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 2

Safety Concepts

This section describes the safety Performance Level concept and explains how
the 450L safety light curtains meet the requirements for SIL 3 and PLe for
Category 4 architectures.

Safety Standards Applied to The 450L safety light curtain satisfies applicable requirements in the following
GuardShield standards that relate to functional and machinery assembly:
• IEC 61496-1/-2 (Type 4)
• IEC 61508 (SIL 3)
• IEC 62061 (SIL CL 3)
• EN/ISO 13849-1 (Performance Level e (PLe), Category 4)
• UL 508
The 450L-E safety light curtain satisfies the applicable requirements that
IEC 60825-1 provides for the integrated laser alignment aid (see Laser
Alignment on page 23).

See the Declaration of Conformity at rok.auto/certifications for published


dates of the individual standards.

Functional Safety Data The functional safety data are listed in Table 72 on page 165. These values refer
to the longest safety light curtain system length (1950 mm [76.77 in.]) with the
smallest resolution (14 mm[0.55 in.]).

For cascaded 450L-E safety light curtain applications, the final PFH value of
the complete system is the sum of the individual PFH values of each pair plus
the sum of the PFH values of the cascading plug-in.
Figure 8 shows the calculation of the PFH of a cascaded system with 450L-E
safety light curtain and two cascading plug-ins.
Figure 8 - Example and PFH Calculation of Cascaded Systems
Pair 1 Pair 2 Pair 3

Cascading Cascading
Plug-in 1 Plug-in 2

PFH (total) = 3x PFH (450L pair) + 2 x PFH (cascading plug-in)

IMPORTANT For 450L-E safety light curtains: If cascading, consider the PFH of each
cascade and each cascading plug-in.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 17


Chapter 2 Safety Concepts

Safety Certification Each 450L safety light curtain is a Type 4 ESPE as defined by IEC 61496-1 and
CLC/TS 61496-2. The safety light curtains are allowed for use with controls in
compliance with the following certifications:
• PLe (in a Category 4 architecture) in compliance with EN ISO 13849
• SIL CL3 in accordance with EN 62061
• SIL 3 in accordance with IEC 61508

Safety requirements are based on the standards applicable at the time of


certification with a proof test interval of 20 years.

The device is suitable for:


• Point of Operation Control (POC) finger and hand detection
• Hazardous area protection
• Access protection

Only allow access to the hazardous point through the protective field. The
machine/system is not allowed to start as long as personnel are within the
hazardous area (see Correct Installation on page 70).

Depending on the application, mechanical protective devices can be required


with the safety light curtain.

TÜV Rheinland has approved the 450L GuardShield™ safety light curtains for
use in safety-related applications where Performance Level (PL) up to E and
safety integrity level up to SIL 3 are required.

TÜV Rheinland confirmed that the integrated laser alignment aid in 450L-E
GuardShield safety light curtains conforms to the classification of laser class
two according to IEC 60825-1.

IMPORTANT Observe the following directives, rules, and regulations to help conform
to proper and safe use of the GuardShield safety light curtain.

The national/international rules and regulations apply to the installation, use,


and periodic technical inspections of the safety light curtain, in particular:
• Machine Directive
• Low Voltage Directive
• Equipment Usage Directive
• Work safety regulations/safety rules
• Other relevant health and safety regulations

Published dates of the individual standards are given in the Declaration of


Conformity (see Certifications on page 169).

Manufacturers and users of the machine with which the safety light curtain is
used must obtain and observe all applicable safety regulations and rules:
• Observe the notices of this user manual, in particular the test regulations
(for example, on use, mounting, installation, or integration into the
existing machine controller).
• Specialist personnel or specially qualified and authorized personnel
must implement, record, and document the tests so the tests can be
reconstructed and retraced at any time.
• This user manual must be available to the user of the machine where the
GuardShield safety light curtain is installed. The machine operator must
be instructed in the use of the device by specialist personnel.

18 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 2 Safety Concepts

Installation Requirements Install the GuardShield safety light curtains in accordance with applicable
regulations and standards.

While you can use GuardShield safety light curtains for SIL 3, PLe, and
Category 4 applications, you must comply with the minimum (safe) distance
requirements; for example, according to EN ISO 13855, if installed in the
European Union.

The installed system, including the safety control system and the machine stop
mechanism, must achieve the needed safety Performance Level. The
GuardShield safety light curtains are only one element in the safety system.
See publication SAFEBK-RM002 for additional guidance.

Possible Misuse GuardShield safety light curtains are used as electro-sensitive protective
equipment in the sense of the Machinery Directive. Use these devices only in
applications such as:
• POC device
• Access control device
• Hazardous area control device

ATTENTION: The following applications and/or environmental conditions can


lead to misuse and potentially cause severe injuries or death (for more
information see IEC 62046).
• Machines, which eject materials, swarf, or component parts
• Risk of injury from thermal or other radiation
• Unacceptable noise levels
• Transparent objects are detected
• Environment that exceeds the specification (see Specifications on
page 165)
Some, but not all, possible limits are electrostatic discharge, radio frequency
interference, vibration/shock, ambient light, pollution, temperature, and
humidity.

Without additional measures (IEC 62998), do not use GuardShield safety light
curtains for the following applications:
• Outdoors
• Under water
• Explosive atmospheres
• Altitudes over 3000 m (1.86 miles) above sea level
• With enhanced ionizing or radar radiation

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 19


Chapter 2 Safety Concepts

Notes:

20 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 3

Operation

This chapter provides information on the special features and properties of the
450L safety light curtain. This chapter also describes the structure and
functions of the unit, particularly the different operating modes.

Principle of Operation A functional GuardShield™ safety light curtain system includes:


• Two transceiver sticks (same model, length, and resolution)
• A transmitter plug-in
• A receiver plug-in

The type of plug-in defines whether a transceiver stick performs as a


transmitter or as a receiver. The maximum distance between transmitter and
receiver sticks is referred to as the operating distance or operating range (see
Figure 9). The GuardShield systems also require a minimum operating
distance. If you install a system below this distance, the safety outputs do not
switch to on. The maximum operating range reduces by using deflector
mirrors and/or weld shields.

The protective field height of a GuardShield safety light curtain is equal to the
total length of the stick.
Figure 9 - Principle Operation of a 450L Safety Light Curtain System
Detection Zone
Transceiver Stick Receiver Stick

Protective Field Height

Operating Distance

Connection Plugs of Connection Plugs of


Inserted Plug-ins Inserted Plug-ins

A short time after the power-up and alignment of a system, invisible infrared
light beams build up a plane of detection (protective field) between the two
sticks. The axis of the detection zone is vertical to the front window of the
safety light curtain sticks.

Infrared light pulses between the two sticks in sequence. The receiver analyzes
and processes the beam status. When one or more beams interrupt, the two
output signal switching devices (OSSDs) turn off. A safety control, safety relay,
or safety contactor evaluates the signal to stop the dangerous state of the
machine.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 21


Chapter 3 Operation

The first laser beam, or the last beam near the end of the sticks, optically
synchronizes the timing of the emission and reception of infrared light pulses.
These beams are synchronization beams. Because the GuardShield systems
optically synchronize, no electrical connection is required between the
transmitter and receiver sticks.

The unique design of the GuardShield platform allows every 450L safety light
curtain transceiver to transmit and receive infrared light. In contrast to the
classical architecture of common pure transmitter and receiver safety light
curtain systems, GuardShield transceiver sticks exchange protective field
information via infrared light. Therefore, infrared light is not only sent from a
transceiver working as a transmitter to a receiver. As indicated in Figure 10, a
transceiver stick configured as a receiver transmits some infrared light to the
transmitter. The dashed lines in Figure 10 indicate the synchronization beams.
Figure 10 - Schematic Display of Beam Center Lines

The slightly slanted beams and the maximum operating angle of the infrared
light require that you install a transmitter and a receiver stick beyond a
minimum operating distance. A 450L safety light curtain system is safe against
manipulation, as you cannot install a transmitter stick directly in front of a
receiver stick.

A GuardShield transceiver, which acts as a receiver, has two OSSD safety


outputs and, depending on the plug-in that is used, one additional non-safety
auxiliary output. When the GuardShield transmitter and receiver are properly
powered, aligned, not obstructed, and the Start/Restart mode is correctly
initiated, both the OSSDs and the auxiliary output are on (output voltage =
+24V DC). The two safety OSSDs are cross-fault monitored and short-circuit
protected.

ATTENTION: The auxiliary output is only a status output for diagnosis


purposes to connect, for example, an indicator lamp. Do not use this output
for safety purposes.

Interruption of the sensing field causes the receiver OSSD to switch off
(sourced current 0 mA DC, source voltage 0V DC).

For automatic restart: No obstruction of the GuardShield sensing field causes


the two safety outputs (OSSD) to switch to the active high (on) state (+24V DC).

With the appropriate resolution, the GuardShield safety light curtain system
provides finger or hand protection. The resolution corresponds to the
diameter of the provided test rod belonging to the safety light curtain. The test
rod is reliably detected when positioned in the protective field. The resolution
of a GuardShield stick is printed on the product label.

22 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 3 Operation

ATTENTION: The resolution of a 450L-E safety light curtain system that is


configured with blanking changes depending on the configuration (see
Blanking and Reduced Resolution on page 28). Consider any change in the
resolution in the safety distance calculation (see Determine the Safety
Distance on page 62) and in the installation.
Figure 11 shows the active lenses for the two resolutions of the safety light
curtain.
Figure 11 - Active Lenses for Different Resolutions
Resolution 14 mm (0.55 in.)

Resolution 30 mm (1.18 in.)


Plug-in
Cable

First Optical Module Second Optical Module

Resolution Lens Number Per Module


[mm (in.)] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
14 (0.56) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
30 (1.19) X — X — X — X — X — X — X — X —

IMPORTANT The gap [approximately 1.5 mm (0.05 in.)] between adjacent modules,
which are red (indicated in Figure 11 for hand and finger resolution), has
no impact on resolution.

Laser Alignment All 450L-E and 450L PAC safety light curtain transceiver sticks have an
integrated laser alignment system (ILAS). The laser works with visible light,
which makes the alignment of a 450L-E and 450L PAC safety light curtain
system much easier.

LASER LIGHT HAZARD: Do not stare into the beam. Each 450L-E and 450L PAC
safety light curtain has a built-in laser alignment system.
LASER CLASS 2 (IEC 60825-1).
Conforms to 21 CFR 1040.10.

You can switch the ILAS on and off by simply placing a finger on the optical
push button, which is near to the hand symbol on the front window (see
Figure 33 on page 60). Once the laser activates, several red laser beams
transmit (see Figure 12 on page 24) from a source close to the optical push
button.

Figure 12 on page 24 shows the principle operation of the ILAS. The brightest
beam transmits perpendicular to the front window, which is also parallel to the
infrared light of the stick. Position the brightest beam at the opposite stick at
the same level as indicated with distance A in Figure 12 on page 24. Target the
other slanted laser beams between the optics center and the housing of the
opposite stick on the front window. The quantity of slanted beams on the
opposite stick depends on the installation distance. To find optimum

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 23


Chapter 3 Operation

alignment for a 450L-E and 450L PAC safety light curtain system, the laser of
each stick must align to the opposite stick.

IMPORTANT A white background (for example, paper) makes it easy to identify the
brightest beam.
Figure 12 - Principal Function of the Integrated Laser Alignment System

IMPORTANT Figure 12 indicates additional visible laser beams (dotted) to the


connection end of the stick. Such beams do not have to be considered
for the alignment procedure.

In a cascading system, each integrated laser system works independently and


can be switched on or off individually.

The 450L-B safety light curtain sticks have no integrated laser alignment
system. For those sticks, an optional external alignment aid (see Figure 143 on
page 178) with a mounting clamp (Figure 144 on page 178) is available.

24 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 4

Safety Function

The 450L safety light curtain offers a range of functions that are integral to the
safety system. You can select the functions via DIP switch settings on the
receiver plug-in.

Confirmation of a new configuration at the receiver stick is only required if the


stick previously operated with another DIP switch setting or with another
plug-in type (see Confirmation of a New System Configuration on page 59).

Confirmation of a new configuration at the transmitter stick is only required if


the stick was previously operated with another beam coding (see Beam Coding
on page 27).

ATTENTION: Test the protective system for proper operation after each
change to the configuration.

You can select some safety functions only with the 450L-E safety light curtain.
A complete overview is provided in Table 1 on page 11.

Start Modes The four start modes are configurable for all GuardShield™ product lines (450L
PAC and both 450L-B and 450L-E POC safety light curtain product lines).
Manual reset options are only provided for 8-pin connection plug-ins. 5-pin
plug-ins have only the automatic start/restart option.

IMPORTANT You can use the Start button to power cycle a receiver stick if there is a
lockout. A receiver stick performs the power off/on cycle if the input of
the Start button activates for a minimum of 10 seconds, but not longer
than 20 seconds. This function is also available if you configure
automatic start for receiver plug-ins, which allow a start mode
selection, see Restart Button on page 91 for additional information.

Automatic Start/Restart (Default)


When in the Automatic Start mode of operation (also known as Guard Only
mode), the safety light curtain operates as an on/off device. The OSSD outputs
switch off, according to an interruption of the sensing field, and automatically
switch on when the protective field is clear. The GuardShield pairs that are
equipped with bottom plug-ins and factory-default DIP switch settings work
in Automatic Start mode.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 25


Chapter 4 Safety Function

Manual Start/Restart
The Manual Start mode of operation (also known as restart interlock) helps
prevent the OSSD outputs from switching on automatically after interruption
and clearance of the protective field or power-up. The GuardShield system
requires a manual start. Start up the system with a momentary N.O. push
button or keyswitch. An orange status indicator (RES) on the 450L safety light
curtain receiver indicates that the system is ready for manual restart.

Manual start is not available in GuardShield safety light curtains with


ArmorBlock® Guard I/O™ connectivity (5-pin bottom plug-in).

Press the Start button for a minimum of 50 ms. The maximum time for
accepting the start pulse is 5 seconds. If the pulse width is too short or too long,
the start function does not execute. The start reacts on the falling edge of the
start pulse.

Manual Cold Start


The manual cold start (also known as start interlock) helps prevent the OSSD
outputs from switching on after power-up of the system, even when the
protective field is unobstructed. After each power-up, the system requires a
one-time manual start for the GuardShield system OSSD outputs to enter the
on-state.

Press the Start button for a minimum of 50 ms. The maximum time for
accepting the start pulse is 5 seconds. If the pulse width is too short or too long,
the start function does not execute. The start reacts on the falling edge of the
start pulse.

After the initial powerup and manual start, the safety light curtain system
operates in the Automatic Start mode. DIP switch settings activate this mode
of operation and selection of the starting method. An orange status indicator
(RES) on the GuardShield receiver indicates that the system is ready to start
manually.

Manual cold start is not available in GuardShield safety light curtains with
ArmorBlock Guard I/O connectivity (5-pin bottom plug-in).

Manual Start/Restart with Off Function


This start mode allows the OSSD outputs to switch on manually (if the
protection field is unobstructed) and switch off manually. Use the same push
button or keyswitch that is used for manual start to turn off the OSSD outputs
manually. When the OSSD outputs switch off because of an interruption of the
protective field, clear the protective field and operate the push button or key
again.

DIP switch settings activate and configure this mode of operation. An orange
status indicator (RES) on the GuardShield receiver indicates that the system is
ready to start manually.

Power Cycle When a GuardShield receiver goes into a lockout state, correct the cause of the
lockout and cycle power. You can use the Start input signal and the optical
push button to cycle power. Press and hold the Start button or the optical push
button 10…20 seconds. The power cycle function is available for all start modes,
including automatic.

26 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 4 Safety Function

External Device Monitoring External device monitoring is configurable for both GuardShield product
(EDM) lines.

EDM is an input signal to the GuardShield receiver. EDM monitors the state of
the primary control contactors of the guarded machinery or other final
switching devices (FSD). The EDM input looks for a change of state of the
contactors/FSD within a time period of 300 ms before the system faults. A fault
causes the safety light curtain to enter a lockout condition (OSSDs off and
error indication). One use of the EDM function is to detect an unsafe condition
such as welded contacts in one of the FSD. DIP switch settings on the
GuardShield receiver plug-in activate this mode of operation, or you can
enable this function in the General settings in the Connected Components
Workbench™ software.

EDM is not available in GuardShield safety light curtains with ArmorBlock


Guard I/O connectivity (M12 5-pin QD plug-in).

Low Operating Range Low operating range minimizes the influence of neighboring optical sensors
on the performance of the 450L safety light curtain. This feature is available on
all 450L GuardShield safety light curtains. Low operating range narrows the
operating distance. The maximum operating distance is reduced, and the
minimum operating distance is increased.
Configure a low operating range by enabling the appropriate DIP switch on
the receiver plug-in, or by enabling the function in the General settings in the
Connected Components Workbench software. The default setting is disabled.

The regional intensity status indicators on the transmitter and receiver


indicate the activation of the low range function.

Beam Coding Beam coding is only configurable for 450L-E and 450L PAC safety light
curtains.

If several safety light curtains operate close to one another, one 450L-E/450L
PAC safety light curtain system can see the transmitter infrared light from
another 450L-E/450L PAC safety light curtain receiver. Such a situation is
called optical cross talk (see Mount Multiple 450L GuardShield Safety Light
Curtains on page 72) and can cause an unsafe installation. To reduce the
probability of optical cross talk, the 450L-E/450L PAC safety light curtain can
exchange the addresses of the paired sticks and generate an alternate
transmitter pulse pattern. This process is referred to as beam coding.

Two settings are available in the 450L-E and 450L PAC safety light curtain —
non-coded and coded. The factory default is non-coded.

If you select beam coding, you must perform a teach-in procedure once at the
transmitter and the corresponding receiver to pair the two sticks.

The pairing procedure for out-of-box systems is only required at the Rx and at
the Tx transceiver stick when you select the beam coding function. Perform the
pairing procedure only once after the first power-up.

Set beam coding with the appropriate DIP switch on the plug-in of the receiver
(Rx) stick and power the system up. If the Rx stick was operated before, first
perform a configuration confirmation at the Rx and then the confirmation for
the pairing.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 27


Chapter 4 Safety Function

The STS status indicator at the transmitter flashes red/green to indicate that
the Tx stick beam coding must be paired with the Rx stick. Follow the
procedure in Confirmation of a New System Configuration on page 59.

ATTENTION: If several systems are in the area, only one single transmitter is
allowed to pair with a given receiver. Confirm that any other adjacent installed
safety light curtain system is switched off during the pairing process.
The beam coding settings have an impact on the response time (see
Response Time on page 46).

Interference Rejection Interference rejection is only configurable for the 450L-E safety light curtain
and is permanently enabled on the 450L PAC safety light curtain.

Interference rejection is an enhancement to beam coding to mitigate optical


interference and cross talk. In applications where enabling beam coding alone
does not mitigate interference, enable the interference rejection feature to
alter the scan pattern, which restricts stray light from a neighboring 450L-E
safety light curtain from affecting operation. Set interference rejection with
the appropriate DIP switch(a) on the plug-in of the receiver.

Another application for interference rejection is in cascaded systems, as the


sticks can mount closely without needing to adhere to the minimum distance
spacing requirements.

IMPORTANT The use of interference rejection affects the response time, which can
impact safety distance. Always verify safety distance when using this
feature.

Blanking and Reduced Blanking and reduced resolution is only configurable for the 450L-E safety
Resolution light curtain.
Blanking and reduced resolutions are typically used to allow objects wider than
the optical resolution to stay in or to pass through the protective field during
normal operation without causing a fault or stop condition (for blanking
application, see Fixed Blanking Application on page 182).

Both are available in the 450L-E safety light curtain per DIP switch
configuration:
• Fixed Teach-in Blanking (see Figure 150 on page 182)
• Reduced Resolution (see Reduced Resolution (Object Number Limited)
on page 32).

IMPORTANT Verify for all Blanking and Reduced Resolution modes that no
undetected access is possible into the danger zone via the blanked
protective field throughout the whole width of the protective field (also
left and right of the blanked object). Maintain this restriction, for
example, with additional mechanical barriers.
The blanking settings have an impact on the response time (see
Response Time on page 46).
You cannot configure muting and blanking simultaneously. You can
activate fixed blanking and reduced resolution simultaneously.

(a) Setting interference rejection by DIP switch assumes the worst case scenario of protection from a neighboring 1950 mm (76.78 in.) length
stick with finger resolution, irrespective of the actual length or resolution of the sticks. See Table 18 on page 49. You can refine and greatly
reduce response time by configuring interference rejection in the software, see Table 19 on page 50.
28 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024
Chapter 4 Safety Function

Teach-in Fixed Blanking Beams are taught to ignore up to four fixed objects in the sensing field. The
blanked fixtures or objects must remain in the sensing field or the 450L-E
safety light curtain enters a Fault state (OSSDs off).

At minimum, the first two active lenses in the protective field at the
connection end or the last two active lenses at the cascading end must be
unblocked (Table 4).

IMPORTANT Blanked areas can require an additional risk analysis. If you do not use
mechanical or other guarding to restrict access to the hazard, consider
the blanked area in the calculation of the safety distance.

The fixed Teach-in Blanking mode of operation activates through DIP switch
settings that are on the following plug-ins:
• 450L-APR-BL-5 (Table 25 on page 56)
• 450L-APR-MU-8 (Table 26 on page 57)

To teach the beams to be blanked, activate the Optical Teach button (near the
hand symbol on the 450L-E safety light curtain front window, see Figure 14 on
page 30), in a specific sequence (see Figure 15 on page 31) while the object is in
the 450L-E safety light curtain sensing field. The safety light curtain Fixed
Blanking mode of operation is not active until the teach procedure is complete.

The Fixed Blanking mode of operation is always monitored. If you remove any
part or all blanked objects from the protective field, the OSSD outputs of the
450L-E safety light curtain go to the off-state and the Rx stick displays a
blanking error (see Table 56 on page 104).
Due to vibrations often present in industrial applications, the number of
physically interrupted beams is one less than the specified number of beams. A
local adjustment of this tolerance value (-1) is not possible with DIP switches.

If the fixed blanked object only blocks one beam, the tolerance value is zero.
This value means that a minimum of one beam must be blocked; there is no
tolerance.

The 450L-E safety light curtain can perform fixed blanking of one or more
adjacent beams. At minimum, one of the two synchronization beams
(Figure 13 on page 30) must be unblocked before and during the Teach-in
procedure.

A teach-in error occurs if one of the cases in Table 4 (see Figure 13 on page 30
for illustration) happens.
Table 4 - Teach-in Errors and Behavior
Case Description Behavior
The first four interrupted objects that start from the connection
More than four independent objects plug-in are taught, all other objects are not taught. As a result, the
1 are in the protective field OSSDs stay in the off condition as long as the additional objects are
in the protective field.
The beams at top and bottom are The teach-in command is ignored and the 450L-E safety light
2 simultaneously blocked curtain continues to operate with the previously taught objects.
The teach-in command completes, but the error indication at the
3 One object is moving during teach-in end of the teach-in process warns that the taught limits can cause
sporadic OSSD switching.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 29


Chapter 4 Safety Function

Two setups that cause a teach-in blanking error:


• Case A: Number of objects > 4
• Case B: Top and Bottom end interrupted
Figure 13 - Teach-in Blanking Error
A B

IMPORTANT Fully test the protective field with the provided test rods, according to
Regular Inspection on page 109.
The configuration and activation of fixed blanking creates a hole to the
left and/or right of the object in the protective field (objects are
indicated in black in Figure 13 on page 30.) If the fixed object that is in
the protective field does not entirely fill the area between the
GuardShield transmitter and receiver, to obstruct access to the hazard
by additional means. You can use mechanical barriers (hard guard) to
obstruct the open area. Open areas are indicated as blue in Figure 13 on
page 30.

ATTENTION: A fixed blanking zone changes the resolution of the 450L-E


safety light curtain system (see Resolution with Blanking on page 34).
Considered this change when you calculate the safety distance.

Table 6 on page 33 shows the reaction of the OSSD outputs with Fixed Blanking
deactivated and activated for different use cases.

Teach-in Blanking Procedure


The procedure to teach a new fixed blanked object is similar to the procedure
to conduct a confirmation of a changed configuration (Confirmation of a New
System Configuration on page 59) with use of the optical push button.

Activate the optical push button (Figure 14) two times for 5 seconds (Figure 15
on page 31). Between the two activations, a break of a maximum of 2 seconds is
allowed.
Figure 14 - Position of Optical Push Button, ILAS, and Status Indicators
Optical Push <STS> Status <BLK> Blanking
ILAS Button Indication Indication

30 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 4 Safety Function

Figure 15 - Teach-In Blanking Configuration Process


< 2s
> 5s > 5s 5s
3s
Optical Push 1 2 4 5
Button Activated

Optical Push
Button Deactivated 3 6 7 8

Configuration Process
1. The status indicator STS is green, which indicates normal operation (no
fault).
2. Actuate the optical push button (Figure 14 on page 30) for 5 seconds.
3. The STS remains continuously green.
4. Once the status indicator STS flashes green, release the optical push
button.
5. Release is indicated with a change of frequency 10…1 Hz (status indicator
STS flashes green and a 50:50 duty cycle).
6. Within 2 seconds, actuate the optical push button.
7. The status indicator STS flashes green to indicate the activation and the
status indicator BLK flashes orange at a frequency of 10 Hz and a 50%
duty cycle to indicate the activation.
8. Actuate the optical push button for at least for 5 seconds.
9. Once the status indicator and the blanking indicator changes frequency
10...1 Hz, release the optical push button.
10. After you release the optical push button, the status indicator STS is
steady green and the status indicator BLK continues to flash for 5
seconds.
11. In these 5 seconds, remove your hand and all objects that are not being
taught.
12. At the end of these 5 seconds, the 450L-E safety light curtain teaches all
interrupted beams.
13. The status indicator BLK flashes orange for 3 seconds and STS is steady
green to indicate a successful Teach-in.
14. The status indicator BLK flashes orange for 3 seconds and STS flashes
green/red to indicate a failed Teach-in.

IMPORTANT If there is an error in the Teach-in procedure, the new fixed blanking
zone limits are not accepted and the safety light curtain continues
working with the previously taught zone limits.
Once the configuration confirmation procedure is completed, verify the
changed resolution.

You can also conduct a Teach-in procedure with the Rockwell Automation
Connected Components Workbench software and an installed optical
interface device (see Optical Interface Device (OID) on page 106).

The following options lead to the deletion of taught fixed blanking areas:
• Change the DIP switch setting and confirm the new DIP setting.
• Insert and confirm another plug-in type.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 31


Chapter 4 Safety Function

Reduced Resolution (Object Reduced resolution is a type of blanking without monitoring whether the
Number Limited) beams are interrupted. The comparable blanking function with monitoring is
called floating blanking. Floating blanking and reduced resolution have
similar functionality, the difference, according to the standard IEC 61496, is
the object monitoring.

Reduced resolution is always specified in combination with a beam number.


There are different types of reduced resolution:
• All blanked beams must be adjacent. The maximum size of the object is
equal to the beam value. This type is only good for one single object
(reduced resolution, single object).
• Blanked beams can be adjacent, but not required. The sum of the size of
all objects in the protective field is not larger than the beam value
(reduced resolution, multiple objects, object number limited).
• Blanked beams can be adjacent, but not required. The size of each object
in the protective field is not larger than the beam value (reduced
resolution, multiple objects, object number unlimited).

The reduced resolution that you can activate with a DIP switch in a 450L-E
safety light curtain refers to the definition (b) multiple objects, object number
limited.

Reduced resolution is not available on 450L PAC safety light curtains.

IMPORTANT The blanking modes that you can activate with the DIP switches in a
450L-E safety light curtain system are equal to the blanking modes that
can be activated in a 440L safety light curtain system.

DIP switch settings activate the Reduced Resolution mode of operation on the
following plug-ins:
• 450L-APR-BL-5 (Table 25 on page 56)
• 450L-APR-MU-8 (Table 26 on page 57)

Reduced resolution of one beam or reduced resolution of two beams allows


you to blank out one or two beams anywhere in the protective field. An
example is when blocked beams are ignored and the 450L-E safety light curtain
remains with OSSD outputs active. Reduced resolution allows an object to
float in (move within, or in and out of) the 450L-E safety light curtain
protective field without causing the safety light curtain outputs to change to
the off-state. For details, see Table 7 on page 33 and Table 8 on page 33.

For reduced resolution with the object number limited, the maximum number
of blanked objects is equal to the beam number (see Table 6 on page 33).

If activated by the DIP switch, the reduced resolution is active over the entire
protective field, except the zones that are already taught with another blanking
type.

IMPORTANT With reduced resolution active, protective field holes can occur that are
left and/or right of the protective field. This occurrence means that at
times when no object is blocking the protective field, there is a danger
that a person can reach through the protective field without
deactivating the machine.

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 4 Safety Function

Table 5 - Nomenclature for Table 6…Table 8


Symbol Description
Beam not interrupted
Beam interrupted
The beam is activated for Fixed Blanking and not interrupted
Beam is activated for Fixed Blanking and interrupted

Table 6 - Status of OSSDs for Different Situations in Case of Fixed Teach-in Blanking
Case 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
IR-Beam No Blanking Fixed Teach-in Blanking
N
N+1
N+2
N+3
N+4
N+5
N+6
Status OSSDs Off On On On Off Off On Off

IMPORTANT For case 3 and case 4 in Table 6, the OSSDs stay on because of the
tolerance (-1).

Table 7 - Status of OSSDs for Different Reduced Resolution Instances


Case 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Reduced
IR- Reduced Resolution Reduced Resolution
Resolution
Beam Deactivated 1 Beam Active 2 Beams Active
N
N+1
N+2
N+3
N+4
N+5
N+6
Status Off On On Off Off On On On On Off Off Off
OSSDs

Table 8 - Status of OSSDs for Different Cases of Reduced Resolution in Combination with Fixed
Teach in Blanking
Case 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Reduced
IR- Reduced Resolution 1 Beam Reduced Resolution 2 Beams
Resolution
Beam and Teach-in Fixed Blanking and Teach-in Fixed Blanking
Deactivated
N
N+1
N+2
N+3
N+4
N+5
N+6
Status On On On Off Off On On On On Off Off Off
OSSDs

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 33


Chapter 4 Safety Function

Resolution with Blanking


ATTENTION: Actuation of the Reduced Resolution mode changes the
resolution of the 450L-E safety light curtain.

Table 9 shows the resolution of a 450L-E safety light curtain for different
blanking mode combinations.
Table 9 - Resolution
GuardShield
Resolution Configured Blanking Type Configured Resolution [mm (in.)]
(No Blanking)
[mm (in.)]
No blanking 14 (0.56)
Single object: 28 (1.11)
Fixed blanking Multiple objects: 42 (1.66)
Reduced resolution one beam 23 (0.91)
14 mm (0.56 in.) Reduced resolution one beam in combination with Fixed 42 (1.66)
Teach-In blanking
Reduced resolution two beams 33 (1.30)
Reduced resolution two beams in combination with 52 (2.05)
Fixed Teach-in blanking
No blanking 30 (1.19)
Single object: 53 (2.09)
Fixed blanking Multiple objects: 82 (3.23)
Reduced resolution one beam 44 (1.74)
30 mm (1.19 in.) Reduced resolution one beam in combination with Fixed 82 (3.23)
Teach-In blanking
Reduced resolution two beams 63 (2.49)
Reduced resolution two beams in combination with 100 (3.94)
Fixed Teach-In blanking

IMPORTANT After each configuration or reconfiguration of a GuardShield safety light


curtain, test the configuration of the safety light curtain using an
appropriate test piece.

The borders between two adjacent blanking zones are especially critical for the
resolutions. Table 9 provides the largest resolution for a complete safety light
curtain system for different DIP switch settings.
For blanking with cascading, see Cascading and Blanking on page 46.

Muting The cascading feature is only available for the 450L-E and 450L PAC safety light
curtain. To enable the muting functionality, install the receiver plug-in
450L-APR-MU-8.

IMPORTANT A detailed description about muting, muting restrictions and hints for
the installation are given in the standard IEC 62046. Additional hints are
mentioned in the attachment A7 of IEC 61496-1. The muting function is
only allowed after you complete a thorough safety analysis according to
EN 13849-1 and ISO EN 12100.

Certain applications in practice require that the protective field of the 450L-E
or 450L PAC safety light curtain mutes automatically without the safety
outputs switching off. A typical example of such an application is a conveyor
belt. You can transport the goods on a pallet through the protective field
without stopping the pallet movement.

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 4 Safety Function

Muting is the temporary automatic suspension of the protective function of a


safeguarding device like a safety light curtain. The muting function allows the
transport of material through a safety light curtain without stopping a
conveyor. To distinguish between material and persons, a certain sequence of
events and timings are used. Muting sensors mount in a certain pattern, and
the material must pass by the sensors and safety light curtain within specified
time limits. If the muting sensor sequence is incorrect or the timing
parameters are violated, the safeguarding device stops the conveyor. An
override signal allows the movement of the material through the safety light
curtain after a violation.

The 450L-E or 450L PAC safety light curtain has three distinct types of muting
where the sequence and timing of signals that the safety light curtain monitors
allows objects to pass through the safety light curtain without shutting down
the machine process. The three available types are:
• Two sensors, T-type muting (bidirectional operation)
• Four sensors, T-type muting (bidirectional operation)
• Two sensors, L-type muting (unidirectional operation)

The two-sensor muting types can connect at the connection plug-in (see
Figure 74 on page 95) or at the cascading plug-in catalog number
450L-APC-IO-8 (see Figure 80 on page 100). The four-sensor muting type can
only connect at the cascading plug-in catalog number 450L-APC-IO-8.

To activate the desired muting functionality, select the DIP switches off the
receiver plug-in catalog number 450L-APR-MU-8 according to Table 26 on
page 57 and Table 28 on page 58.

You can configure each of these functions with manual or automatic reset.

IMPORTANT You must set the safety function block muting to manual reset. In case
the safety light curtain is set to automatic start, the safety relay or the
safety PLC manages the manual reset.

Muting Lamp
Depending on the risk assessment of the application, a muting lamp is
necessary to warn you when the safety light curtain is muted (see details in IEC
62046). The muting lamp is on when the safety light curtain is muted.
If an error in the muting sequence occurs, the muting lamp flashes (see
Troubleshoot on page 103), which indicates that the muting condition is not
initiated, or is discontinued.

Muting Sensors

IMPORTANT Detailed information about muting sensors (for example, positioning) is


given in the standard IEC 62046.

Mechanical muting sensors must have an opening contact. For proper


operation, the muting sensors are on (N.C.) if the safety light curtain is not
muted.
The safety relay, the 450L-E or 450L PAC safety light curtain, and the muting
sensors must have the same reference (24V Com) for proper operation.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 35


Chapter 4 Safety Function

Photoelectric muting sensors do not need certification, according to safety


Type 2 or 4 of IEC 61496-1/-2. The detection zone of the muting sensors must be
within 30° of horizontal and mounted at a height suitable to detect the leg of a
person (see IEC 62046).

Various positions and sizes of materials on the pallet can complicate an


uninterrupted muting signal over the entire passage through the guarded
area. For this reason, an off-delay time t(msdel) for the muting sensor inputs
and the safety light curtain is set to 50 ms.

IMPORTANT The muting sensors detect the material on a pallet and not the pallet
itself.

Mute Dependent Override Function (MDO)


Normal activation of the Manual Start button only happens if no muting
sensors are active and the safety light curtain is not interrupted.

An error in the muting sequence does not allow a muting condition. If the
safety light curtain is interrupted, the OSSD safety outputs of the 450L-E safety
light curtain switch off. This error typically leads to a cessation of movement.

In such a case, it can be difficult to move the material out of the protected area.
If you anticipate this situation (an error in the muting sequence or timing), the
Reset button provides an MDO (depending on DIP switch settings). Activating
the Reset button (manual start) can temporarily reactivate the OSSD safety
outputs. The maximum allowable duration tmdo for this MDO is provided in
Table 10 on page 38, Table 11 on page 39, and Table 13 on page 42 of the
individual muting types.

IMPORTANT Confirm that you can install the MDO, based on the risk assessment of
the application. Some applications can require a spring-loaded
keyswitch for the reset.

The MDO is possible at the same pin when you configure automatic start. For
this case, the connected safety relay or safety logic performs the manual reset.

IMPORTANT In muting applications, the reset of the muting function block must be a
manual reset. Either the safety light curtain and/or the safety relay that
connects to the safety light curtain performs the manual reset.
A push button or a spring-loaded keyswitch activates the MDO. The push
button/keyswitch mounts where the dangerous area is visible.

The MDO automatically ends after the mute dependent override time (tmdo)
elapsed, or when the safety light curtain is no longer interrupted, whichever
occurs first.

The muting functionality does not have an impact on the response time of the
450L-E or 450L PAC safety light curtain.

Two-sensor T-type Muting


The sensors and safety light curtain form the shape of an upside down T, when
viewed from the side. The muting sensors (MS) mount to form an X sensing
pattern where the sensing beams cross near the center of the safety light
curtain (LC).

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 4 Safety Function

Figure 16 - Two-sensor T-type Muting Arrangement


LC
MS MS

Machine Material Material Conveyor

Muting Lamp

The muting sensors can mount symmetrically (equal distance from the safety
light curtain) or asymmetrically (unequal distance from the safety light
curtain).

The material can break either the MS1 or MS2 sensor first, then the other
sensor, and then the safety light curtain. As the material clears the safety light
curtain, the material must then clear MS2 or MS1 first, and then the other
sensor. The muting lamp turns on shortly after the second sensor is blocked,
and the safety light curtain is muted.

Either of these two patterns is acceptable:


• MS1↑ MS2↓ LC↓ LC↑ MS2↑ MS1↑
• MS2↓ MS1↑ LC↓ LC↑ MS1↑ MS2↑
The cross point of the two light beams is behind the sensing field of the safety
light curtain in the direction of the dangerous area.
The height of the cross point of the two muting sensors is at the same level as
or higher than the lowest beam of the safety light curtain.

Verify that the distance from the cross point to the protective field of the safety
light curtain is as short as possible.
During the muting process, i is impossible for a person to enter the undetected
dangerous area to the left or right of the object.
With proper arrangement of the sensors, the conveyor can move in the
forward or reverse direction and maintain safeguard integrity.
For sensor connection, see Table 39 on page 84 and Table 43 on page 86 for the
cascading plug-in.
Figure 17 - Muting Time for Two-sensor T-type Muting Arrangement
ESPE

Muting Sensor S1 (S2)

Muting Sensor S2 (S1)

Mute
tespe tespe
tsens tsens

tMute

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 37


Chapter 4 Safety Function

For proper operation, MS1 and MS2 must activate/deactivate within the time
(tsens), and the safety light curtain must be clear before the muting time (tMute)
expires.

Muting of the safety light curtain happens when muting sensor MS1 and MS2
activate within the specified time (tsens). Since this muting mode is
bidirectional, the muting sequence also functions in reverse (for example,
muting sensor one before muting sensor two, or two before one are both
allowed). Both signals, however, cannot arrive simultaneously
(tsens minimum). The muting condition stops if one of the muting sensors is
not active, or if the maximum muting time (tMute) is exceeded (muting
timeout).

The minimum time between the sensors (tsens minimum) is dependent on the
position of the muting sensors and the speed of the object to be muted. For
more dependable operation, maintain at least a delay of tsens minimum.

Table 10 shows the default timing values for T-type muting. You can adjust
these values with the Connected Components Workbench software.
Table 10 - Two-sensor T-type Muting Default Settings
Parameter Default Value Parameter Default Value
tsens 4s tmdo 20 s
tsens min 50 ms tespe 5s
tMute 5 minutes

If tsens, tespe or tMute exceeds, the STS and the MUT indicator flashes (Table 56
on page 104). The muting lamp output has the same characteristic as the MUT
status indicator. If the material backs away from the sensors, the fault clears
and the muting lamp turns off. If the material breaks the safety light curtain,
the OSSD output turns off. The STS and MUT status indicator continue to
flash. Use the muting override command to turn on the OSSD outputs
temporarily and clear the material from the protective field.

IMPORTANT It must be impossible for a person to pass undetected to the left or


right of the object during the muting process.

Two-sensor L-type Muting


The sensors and safety light curtain form the shape of the letter L, when
viewed from the side. The muting sensors (MS) mount on one side of the safety
light curtain.
Figure 18 - Two-sensor L-type Muting Arrangement
LC
MS1 MS2
Muted LC

Machine Conveyor Material

Muting Lamp

Use this muting mode to allow a load to exit a dangerous area and help prevent
access from outside the dangerous area. The object that comes from the
dangerous area interrupts the two muting sensors, which initiates the muting
of the safety light curtain. As the object continues to move through the
protective field, muting remains active until the safety light curtain is no
longer interrupted.

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 4 Safety Function

For sensor connection, see Table 39 on page 84 and Table 43 on page 86 for the
cascading plug-in.
Figure 19 - Timing Sequence for Two-sensor L-type Muting Arrangement
ESPE

Muting Sensor S1

Muting Sensor S2

Mute tespe tespe


tsens tsens

tMute

Muting of the safety light curtain initiates only after muting sensor MS1 and
MS2 activate within the specified time (tsens). The muting condition stops after
tespe is exceeded, the safety light curtain is no longer interrupted, or the
maximum muting time (tMute) is exceeded (muting timeout), which ever
occurs first.

Table 11 shows the default muting and synchronization times. You can adjust
these values with the Connected Components Workbench software.
Table 11 - Two-sensor L-type Muting Default Settings
Parameter Default Value Parameter Default Value
tsens 3s tmdo 20 s
tsens min 50 ms tespe 3s
tMute 5 min

Only use the two-sensor L-type muting arrangement for material that exits the
hazardous area. Do not use for material that enters the hazardous area.

It must be impossible for a person to pass undetected to the left or right of the
object during the muting process.

Two-sensor T-type Muting with Enable


You can only configure this muting mode with Connected Components
Workbench software. Use this muting mode for applications when muting is
only possible at certain times; for example, only when a conveyor runs. You can
also use this muting mode when the size and position of the pallet load is
irregular or the size of the pallet is smaller than the width of the conveyor.
Because only one optical sensor is on either side of the safety light curtain, this
mode requires an additional enable signal to initiate the muting sequence (for
example, a conveyor run signal). This signal must be low before muting can
initiate.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 39


Chapter 4 Safety Function

Figure 20 - Two-sensor T-type Muting with Enable Arrangement


LC
MS1 MS2
MS3

Machine Material Conveyor

LC Muting Lamp

The height of the two muting sensors must be at the same level as or higher
than the lowest beam of the safety light curtain.

The distance between the S1 or S2 sensors to the safety light curtain must be
sufficient so that the leg of a person cannot activate them simultaneously
[>250 mm (9.8 in.)].

It must be impossible for a person to pass undetected to the left or right of the
object during the muting process. Figure 21 shows the corresponding timing
sequence for such an arrangement.
Figure 21 - Timing Sequence for Two-sensor T-type Muting with Enable
ESPE

Muting Signal S3

Muting Sensor S1

Muting Sensor S2

Mute tespe tespe

tsens tsens

tMute

Muting of the safety light curtain is active only when both enable signal S3 and
sensor S1 in one direction, or enable signal S3 and sensor S2 in the opposite
direction, activate simultaneously. There are no timing limitations from when
the S3 signal goes LO to when the applicable muting sensor goes LO.

The object must be long enough to block both sensors.

The muted condition remains only if muting sensors S1 and S2 are active
within the specified time (tsens) and less than the muting time (tMute).

The muting condition stops if one of the following occurs:


• S3 and S1 are no longer active (one direction)
• S3 and S2 are no longer active (other direction)
• The maximum muting time (tMute) is exceeded (muting timeout)

Only after one muting sequence is complete can a new muting sequence start.
The enable signal S3 must first go HI before returning to LO, in order for a
second object to pass through the safety light curtain (for example, the
equivalent to a conveyor stop and restart).

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 4 Safety Function

Table 12 shows the default settings for two-sensor L-type muting with enable.
Use Connected Components Workbench software to change the settings.
Table 12 - Two-sensor T-type Muting with Enable Default Settings
Parameter Default Value
tsens 4s
tMute 5 min
tmdo 20 s
tespe 4s

If you get a timing error, the mute lamp flashes at 1 Hz and the mute timing
error output turns on.

If the object stops in front of the first sensor and does not block the safety light
curtain, the mute timing error goes HI and the mute lamp flashes at 1 Hz. The
OSSD outputs remain on so you can reverse the conveyor and restart the
muting sequence.

Use the S3 muting signal to clear the errors. When S3 goes HI, the mute timing
error, the mute sequence error, and the muting error outputs clear.

Four-sensor Muting
The sensors and safety light curtain form the shape of an upside down T when
viewed from the side. Two muting sensors (MS) mount on either side of the
safety light curtain (LC).
Figure 22 - Four-sensor Muting
LC
MS4 MS3 MS2 MS1
Muted LC

Machine Material Conveyor

Muting Lamp

The material can travel in either direction, which breaks MS1 first and MS4
last, or breaks MS4 first and MS1 last. The muting lamp turns on and the safety
light curtain mutes after the second sensor is blocked. The object must be large
enough to interrupt all four sensors.

For muting sensor connections, see Table 44 on page 86.


Considered this muting mode when the size and position of the pallet load is
irregular, or the size of the pallet is smaller than the width of the conveyor. This
mode can require more space than the two-sensor T-type with Enable Signal
Muting mode.

Sensors two and three (closest to the safety light curtain) mount within
200 mm (7.87 in.) of the safety light curtain. This position makes it difficult for
you to enter the dangerous zone undetected by preceding or following a load
system into the dangerous zone.

The distance between any two muting sensors must be greater than 250 mm
(9.84 in.) so that the leg of a person cannot activate them simultaneously.

The distance between sensors MS1 and MS4 is such that a cylindrical object
with a diameter of 500 mm (19.68 in.) with its axis parallel to the protective
field cannot activate the muting function when moved in any point of the gate
at any speed up to 1.6 m/s (see IEC 62064).
Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 41
Chapter 4 Safety Function

The muting sensors MS1…MS4 detect the objects on pallets and not the pallet
itself. When this action is impractical, additional measures can be necessary to
deter people from entering the zone by sitting on the pallet.
Figure 23 - Timing Sequence for Four-Sensor Muting
ESPE

Muting Sensor S1

Muting Sensor S2

Muting Sensor S3

Muting Sensor S4

Mute
tespe tespe
tsens tsens
tMute

Muting of the 450L-E safety light curtain is achieved only when muting sensors
MS1 and MS2 activate within the specified time (tsens). The delay between the
sensors must be larger than tsens minimum. For a successful muting sequence,
all four sensors must simultaneously activate for a certain time period.

The muting condition stops when either sensor MS3 or MS4 deactivates, or the
maximal muting time (tMute) is exceeded (muting timeout). Since this muting
mode is bidirectional, the muting sensor sequence also functions in reverse
(such as MS4 =>MS1).

Table 13 shows the default time limits. Adjusted the limits with the Connected
Components Workbench software.
Table 13 - Four-sensor T-type Muting Default Time Limit Settings
Parameter Default Value
tsens 4s
tsens min 50 ms
tMute 5 minutes
tmdo 20 s
tespe 5s

A time (tsens) of 4 seconds is recommended in IEC 62046.

The behavior of the muting lamp status indicator is analogous to the behavior
described in Two-sensor T-type Muting on page 36.

It is impossible for a person to pass undetected to the left or right of the object
during the muting process.

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 4 Safety Function

Cascading The cascading feature is only available for the 450L-E and 450L PAC safety light
curtain. Only use a 450L-B safety light curtain as the last pair of a cascaded
450L-E safety light curtain system.

The insertion of an additional cascading plug-in (catalog number 450L-APC-


IO-8) at the top cascading end of the stick enables cascading. Depending on
the configuration of the DIP switches at the connection plug-in module, the
functions of the I/O at the cascading plug-in can change (for example, for
muting applications). The different settings for the pins of the cascading
plug-in are provided in Table 41 on page 85 …Table 44 on page 86.

IMPORTANT Unless you use either 450L-E firmware 5.004 (min) with interference
rejection enabled, or 450L PAC cascading with the catalog number
450L-APC-IO-8 cascading plug-in, you require a minimum distance
between two adjacent cascaded pairs (Figure 26 on page 45).
See 450L Safety Light Curtain with Interference Rejection on page 76
for more information on interference rejection.

Once you insert the catalog number 450L-APC-IO-8 cascading plug-in, the I/O
of the cascading plug-in provides the option to connect an additional 450L
safety light curtain with an 8-pin connection in series (see Figure 25 on
page 44). This feature allows up to four pairs of 450L-E or 450L PAC safety light
curtain transmitters and receivers to interconnect in series.

Figure 24 and Figure 25 on page 44 specify the nomenclature for cascaded


systems.
Figure 24 - Nomenclature Used for a Noncascaded Setup
Pair = System

Stick

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 43


Chapter 4 Safety Function

Figure 25 - Nomenclature for Cascaded Design (Example Three Cascaded Pairs)


Pair 1 Pair 2 Pair 3
Cascaded Host Pair

Cascaded Pair
Cascaded Host Stick

Cascaded Stick

Cascaded System

Cascaded Units

The first pair in a cascaded system is called the host pair. The OSSD outputs of
the host pair connect to safety contactors, a safety relay, or a safety PLC.

Cascading allows the 450L-E or 450L PAC safety light curtain to help protect
multiple sides of a machine and to connect the complete design with only two
OSSD safety outputs to the machine safety control.

See Cascading Application on page 183 for a typical application with cascading.

ATTENTION: Maintain a minimum spacing distance unless you use either


450L-E firmware 5.004 (min) with interference rejection enabled, or 450L PAC
to avoid optical crosstalk (see Mount Multiple 450L GuardShield Safety Light
Curtains on page 72) or optical interference between the two adjacent pairs.
This minimum spacing distance is a function of the operating distance D
between the transmitter and receiver. The spacing distance (S) must be larger
than 0.026 x D. Figure 26 on page 45 identifies the spacing distance and
operating distance of a cascaded pair. Table 14 on page 45 shows examples of
the spacing distance (S) for typical operating distances when no additional
optical barriers are installed between the pairs.
See 450L Safety Light Curtain with Interference Rejection on page 76 for more
information on interference rejection.
The minimum spacing distance does not apply for 450L-E with interference
rejection enabled, or 450L PAC.

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 4 Safety Function

Figure 26 identifies the spacing and operating distance of a cascaded safety


light curtain pair.
Figure 26 - Identification of Spacing (S) and Distance (D)

Table 14 - Minimum Spacing Distance (S) between Cascaded Pairs without Optical Barriers
D S
[m (ft)] [mm (in.)]
1 (3.28) 26 (1.02)
5 (16.4) 132 (5.2)
10 (32.8) 264 (10.4)
15 (49.2) 393 (15.5)

The cascade feature is available for protective field heights of 300 mm (11.81 in.)
and longer. Do not use 450L safety light curtain transceiver sticks with a length
of 150 mm (5.9 in.) as a host pair or a middle pair in a cascaded system.
However, you can use a 150 mm (5.95 in.) 450L-E or 450L PAC safety light
curtain as the last pair in a cascaded system.

A maximum of four 450L-E or 450L PAC safety light curtains can interconnect
with a common pair of OSSDs. For POC systems, each cascaded pair can have a
resolution of 14 mm (0.56 in.) or 30 mm (1.19 in.) and a protective field height of
up to 1950 mm (76.77 in.). PAC systems are all 30 mm (1.19 in.) resolution and all
four versions (single-beam, 2-beam, 3-beam, and 4-beam) can be cascaded. An
exception is noted previously for the single-beam, which you can only use as
the last pair in a cascaded system. Each cascading pair operates as an
independent safety light curtain.

A cable length between two cascaded sticks must not exceed 10 m (32.8 ft).

If you use a catalog number 450L-E or 450L PAC safety light curtain transceiver
with an installed catalog number 450L-APC-IO-8 cascading plug-in as a
standalone safety light curtain pair or as the last segment in a cascaded
system, the cascading plug-in must end with:
• Termination plug catalog number 898D-81CU-DM(a) at the cascading
plug-in of a transceiver that works as an Rx.
• Termination plug catalog number 898D-81CU-DM or M12 sealing cap
(catalog number 1485A-M12) at the cascading plug-in of a transceiver that
works as a Tx.
Figure 27 - Cascaded System with Cat. No. 450L-APC-IO-8 as Last Module
Pair 1 Pair 2 1485A-M12
Tx

Rx
898D-81CU-DM
Cascaded Cascaded
Plug-in 1 Plug-in 2

(a) The termination plug has three pins that are shorted together (pins 2, 5, and 6) and are only needed on the receiver side.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 45


Chapter 4 Safety Function

When a 450L-E or 450L PAC safety light curtain stick operates as a receiver
with a catalog number 450L-APC-IO-8 cascading plug-in, the corresponding
transmitter can accept, but does not require, the installation of a catalog
number 450L-APC-IO-8 cascading plug-in (see Figure 28).
Figure 28 - Cascaded System
Pair 1 Pair 2 Pair 3
Tx3
Tx2
Tx1

Rx

A cascaded system with three pairs and only two catalog number
450L-APC-IO-8 supply power for all transmitters that are wired separately.

Manual Start modes and relay monitoring (EDM) are not available on cascaded
middle and end pairs of a cascading 450L safety light curtain system with DIP
switch configuration. However, you can configure these operating modes at
the receiver of the host pair and allow the whole cascading system to operate in
these modes.

For features like beam coding or blanking, configure each cascaded pair
separately.

For two-sensor muting applications, the muting function applies to the


cascaded system. You cannot apply four-sensor muting to cascaded systems.

Cascading and Blanking


When you install a 450L-E safety light curtain for cascading, each cascading
450L-E pair operates as a standalone safety light curtain pair with its OSSDs
connected in series to the host pair OSSDs. Therefore, if requested, you must
configure fixed blanking and/or reduced resolution in each cascaded pair. To
configure, insert an 8-pin catalog number 450L-APR-MU-8 plug-in that
provides the blanking functionality in each 450L-E safety light curtain receiver.
First, set the DIP switches for the requested blanking function before you
assemble the safety light curtain sticks. Then align all pairs and secure the
brackets. Then you can teach each safety light curtain pair receiver with the
Teach-In procedure. A successful completion of the teach function changes the
operating mode of that pair only. During the teach-in process, the OSSDs of
that pair and the OSSDs of the host segment are off (0V). You can also use
Connected Components Workbench software to configure blanking for each
cascaded pair.

Blanking is not available on 450L PAC safety light curtains.

Response Time The response time (Tr) of the safety light curtain is the time from when the
protective field of the safety light curtain is interrupted to when the safety
outputs turn off. The safety light curtain features the application uses affect
the response time.

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 4 Safety Function

Standard Response Time, Ts

The standard response time refers to the response time for a standard on/off
application. The standard application includes the following:
• Any start mode
• All operating ranges
• All EDM settings

The standard application excludes the following advanced features:


• Beam coding
• Interference rejection
• Blanking (fixed or floating)
• Cascading
• Multiple zones
• Muting
• Reduced resolution
• Multiple scans
• Short interruption ignore time

For the purposes of determining the response time, floating blanking is


equivalent to reduced resolution.

Although muting is considered an advanced feature, muting has no effect on


the response time.
The standard response time is dependent on the following:
• Safety light curtain type (PAC or POC [B or E])
• Resolution (finger or hand)
• Protective height

The standard response time for the 450L-B safety light curtain is shown in
Table 15. The standard response time for the 450L-E safety light curtain is
shown in Table 16 on page 48. In these tables, Tr = Ts.
Table 15 - Standard Response Time for 450L-B
Protective Height Response Time (Ts) Response Time (Ts)
[mm (in.)] Finger [14 mm (0.55 in.)] Resolution [ms] Hand [30 mm (1.18 in.)] Resolution [ms]
150 (5.91) 14 14
300 (11.81) 14 14
450 (17.72) 14 14
600 (23.62) 14 14
750 (29.53) 14 14
900 (35.43) 14 14
1050 (41.34) 16 14
1200 (47.24) 17 14
1350 (53.15) 19 14
1500 (59.06) 20 14
1650 (64.96) 22 14
1800 (70.87) 23 14
1950 (76.77) 25 15

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 47


Chapter 4 Safety Function

Table 16 - Standard Response Time for 450L-E


Protective Height Response Time (Ts) Response Time (Ts)
[mm (in.)] Finger [14 mm (0.55 in.)] Resolution [ms] Hand [30 mm (1.18 in.)] Resolution [ms]
150 (5.91) 9 8
300 (11.81) 10 9
450 (17.72) 11 9
600 (23.62) 12 10
750 (29.53) 14 11
900 (35.43) 14 11
1050 (41.34) 14 12
1200 (47.24) 15 12
1350 (53.15) 16 13
1500 (59.06) 17 13
1650 (64.96) 18 13
1800 (70.87) 19 13
1950 (76.77) 20 13

Table 17 - Standard Response Time for 450L PAC


Response Time (Ts)
Number of Beams Protective Height [mm (in.)]
Resolution [ms]
1 150 (5.91) <20
2 600 (23.62) <20
3 900 (35.43) <20
4 1050 (41.34) <20

Advanced Feature Response Time, Ta

The response time of advanced features requires a complex algorithm. The


response time is also dependent upon whether you configure the features via
the DIP switches on the plug-in or the Connected Components Workbench
software.

Table 18 on page 49 shows response times when you use the DIP switches on
the plug-in to set the advanced features. The description of each column is:
Column Description
1 Standard operation with beam coding
2 Fixed blanking up to four zones
3 Fixed blanking up to four zones with beam coding
4 Reduced resolution, single beam
5 Reduced resolution, single beam with beam coding
6 Reduced resolution, two beams
7 Reduced resolution, two beams with beam coding
8 Fixed blanking up to four zones + reduced resolution, single beam
9 Fixed blanking up to four zones + reduced resolution, single beam with beam coding
10 Fixed blanking up to four zones + reduced resolution, two beams
11 Fixed blanking up to four zones + reduced resolution, two beams with beam coding
12 Standard operation with interference rejection

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 4 Safety Function

Table 18 - Response Time, Ta (Set by DIP Switches)

Response Time, Ta (ms)


Protective
Height 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
[mm (in.)]
Finger Resolution
150 (5.91) 9 14 16 12 13 15 16 17 19 18 20 83
300 (11.81) 11 15 17 13 14 17 18 19 20 20 21 83
450 (17.72) 13 17 19 15 16 18 19 20 22 21 23 83
600 (23.62) 14 18 20 16 18 19 21 21 23 22 24 83
750 (29.53) 15 19 21 17 18 20 21 23 24 24 25 83
900 (35.43) 15 19 21 17 18 20 21 23 24 24 25 83
1050 (41.34) 16 19 22 17 20 20 23 23 26 24 27 83
1200 (47.24) 18 20 24 18 21 21 24 23 27 24 28 83
1350 (53.15) 19 21 26 19 23 22 26 24 29 25 30 83
1500 (59.06) 21 22 27 20 24 23 27 25 30 27 31 83
1650 (64.96) 22 23 29 21 26 24 29 27 32 28 33 83
1800 (70.87) 24 25 30 23 27 26 30 28 33 29 34 83
1950 (76.77) 25 26 32 24 29 27 32 29 35 30 36 83
Hand Resolution
150 (5.91) 9 12 13 12 12 15 15 16 16 17 17 83
300 (11.81) 9 14 16 12 13 15 16 17 19 18 20 83
450 (17.72) 10 15 16 13 14 16 17 18 19 19 21 83
600 (23.62) 11 15 17 13 14 17 18 19 20 20 21 83
750 (29.53) 12 16 18 14 15 17 18 19 21 20 22 83
900 (35.43) 13 17 19 15 16 18 19 20 22 21 23 83
1050 (41.34) 13 17 19 15 17 18 20 20 23 21 24 83
1200 (47.24) 14 18 20 16 18 19 21 21 23 22 24 83
1350 (53.15) 14 19 21 17 18 20 21 22 24 23 25 83
1500 (59.06) 14 19 21 17 18 20 21 22 24 23 25 83
1650 (64.96) 14 19 21 17 18 20 21 22 24 23 25 83
1800 (70.87) 15 19 21 17 18 20 21 22 24 23 25 83
1950 (76.77) 16 19 22 17 19 20 22 22 25 23 26 83

Table 19 on page 50 shows the worst-case response times when you use the
Connected Components Workbench software to set the multiple advanced
features. Shorter response times are typically achieved. The Connected
Components Workbench software reports a diagnostic table that shows the
actual response time.

The initial release of the 450L PAC safety light curtain does not support the
Connected Components Workbench software.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 49


Chapter 4 Safety Function

Table 19 - Response Time, Ta (Set by the Connected Components Workbench Software


Configuration)
Response Time, Ta (ms)
Protective Reduced Resolution (Floating Reduced Resolution (Floating Standard Operation with
Height
[mm (in.)] Blanking) (1) Blanking), with beam coding (1) Interference Rejection (2)
Finger Resolution
150 (5.91) 23 24 22
300 (11.81) 26 28 27
450 (17.72) 32 35 32
600 (23.62) 33 36 37
750 (29.53) 48 51 42
900 (35.43) 48 51 47
1050 (41.34) 49 53 52
1200 (47.24) 50 54 57
1350 (53.15) 55 60 63
1500 (59.06) 57 62 68
1650 (64.96) 72 78 73
1800 (70.87) 73 79 78
1950 (76.77) 74 81 83
Hand Resolution
150 (5.91) 21 22 19
300 (11.81) 23 24 22
450 (17.72) 25 27 24
600 (23.62) 26 28 27
750 (29.53) 31 34 29
900 (35.43) 32 35 32
1050 (41.34) 32 35 34
1200 (47.24) 33 36 37
1350 (53.15) 47 51 40
1500 (59.06) 47 51 42
1650 (64.96) 47 51 45
1800 (70.87) 47 51 47
1950 (76.77) 48 52 50
(1) Single-beam, reduced resolution, one object outside the blanked zones.
(2) When you use and configure the interference rejection feature with software, the system with the largest response time
dictates the response time for both systems. For example, when you enable interference rejection on two systems where one
system is 1200 mm (47.24 in.) finger resolution and the other system is 1650 mm (64.96 in.) hand resolution, both systems
result with a response time of 57 ms.

Multiple Scan
When you enable multiple scan, the response time increases by approximately
33%. See the diagnostic property 3.30 in the Connected Components
Workbench software for the actual response time.

Not applicable for 450L PAC safety light curtains.

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 4 Safety Function

Short Interruption Time


You can configure the 450L-E safety light curtain to ignore interruptions up to
174 ms. This value is added to the response time. See the diagnostic property
3.30 in the Connected Components Workbench software for the actual
response time.
Not applicable for 450L PAC safety light curtains.

Cascading Response Time, Tc


The response time of a cascaded safety light curtain is an adder due to the
cascading plug-in (catalog number 450L-APC-IO-8). The adder must consider
the total number of cascading plug-ins between the cascaded stick and the
host stick. Therefore, the total response time is calculated as:
Tc = 6 ms
Standard features: Tr = Ts + (n x Tc)
Advanced features: Tr = Ta + (n x Tc)

Figure 29 shows an example with three pairs of safety light curtains. The
cascading adder for Pair 1 is zero, as Pair 1 is the host. Pair 2 has one cascading
plug-in between itself and the host, so the adder is 6 ms. Pair 3 has two
cascading plug-ins between itself and the host, so the adder to the response
time is 12 ms.
Figure 29 - Response Time Calculation for each Cascaded Pair
Pair 1 Pair 2 Pair 3
450L-E4FL0600YD 450L-E4FL0300YD 450L-E4FL1800YD
-IO-8

-IO-8

Tx = 12 ms Ts = 10 ms Ts = 19 ms
Tc = 0 ms Tc = 1 x 6 ms Tc = 2 x 6 ms
-APC

-APC

Tr (1) = 12+0 ms = 12 ms Tr (2) = 10+6 ms = 16 ms Tr (3) = 19+12 ms = 31 ms


450L

450L

Connected Components Workbench Response Time


Connected Components Workbench software reports the response time when
the configuration is locked. Figure 30 shows an example of the response time
report from the Connected Components Workbench software. On the
Diagnose screen, scroll down the diagnostic parameter to 3.30.

The Connected Components Workbench software does not support the initial
release of 450L PAC safety light curtains.
Figure 30 - Response Time in Connected Components Workbench Diagnostic Parameter 3.30

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 51


Chapter 4 Safety Function

IMPORTANT Determine the stop time: The stop time calculation must include the
response times of all devices in the stop circuit (see Determine the
Safety Distance on page 62). To not including all device and control
system elements when you calculate the stop time results in an
inaccurate safety distance calculation.

Product Labels
Figure 31 shows examples of the response time that is printed on the
GuardShield sticks. Do not use this response time to calculate the safety
distance calculation. Use the information in this user manual to determine the
response time. This information is removed in future changes of the label.
Figure 31 - Response Time on the Product Label

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 5

System Configuration

An authorized person must perform the system configuration by setting the


DIP switches at the receiver plug-in. First set the DIP switches, then mount the
safety light curtain and establish the electrical connections.

Table 20…Table 22 on page 54 show which plug-ins are available and which
functionality that you can select with the receiver plug-in.

You can use the blanking and the muting plug-in to operate a 450L-B safety
light curtain, but you cannot select muting, blanking, or beam coding
functionality.
Table 20 - Functionalities Available for 450L-B Safety Light Curtain
Transmitter Plug-in Receiver Plug-in Universal Plug-in
Description On/Off EDM Blanking Muting
450L-APT-PW-5 450L-APT-PW-8 450L-APU-UN-8
450L-APR-ON-5 450L-APR-ED-8 450L-APR-BL-5 450L-APR-MU-8
Number of connection pins 5 8 (1) 5 8 5 8 8
Number of DIP switches 0 0 4 8 8 8 12
Low range activation — —     
Start mode selection — — —  —  
EDM — — —  —  
Transmitter and receiver functionality — — — — — — 
Blanking (2) — — — — — — —
(2) — — — — — — —
Muting
Interference rejection — — — — — — —
Beam coding — — — — — — —
(1) The 8-pin M12 for the transmitter is simply for the convenience of specifying two 8-conductor cordsets for the system.
(2) Not available on 450L-B safety light curtain.

Table 21 - Functionalities Available for 450L-E Safety Light Curtain


Transmitter Plug-in Receiver Plug-in Universal Plug-in
Description On/Off EDM Blanking Muting
450L-APT-PW-5 450L-APT-PW-8 450L-APR-ON-5 450L-APR-ED-8 450L-APR-BL-5 450L-APR-MU-8 450L-APU-UN-8

Number of connection pins 5 8 (1) 5 8 5 8 8


Number of DIP switches 0 0 4 8 8 8 12
Low range activation — —     
Start mode selection — — —  —  
EDM — — —  —  
Transmitter and receiver functionality — — — — — — 
Blanking — — — —   —
Muting — — — — —  —
Interference rejection — —     
Beam coding — —     
(1) The 8-pin M12 for the transmitter is simply for the convenience of specifying two 8-conductor cordsets for the system.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 53


Chapter 5 System Configuration

Table 22 - Functionalities Available for 450L PAC Safety Light Curtain


Transmitter Plug-in Receiver Plug-in Universal Plug-in
Description On/Off EDM Muting
450L-APT-PW-5 450L-APT-PW-8 450L-APU-UN-8
450L-APR-ON-5 450L-APR-ED-8 450L-APR-MU-8
Number of connection pins 5 8 (1) 5 8 8 8
Number of DIP switches 0 0 4 8 8 12
Low range activation — —    
Start mode selection — — —   
EDM — — —   
Transmitter and receiver functionality — — — — — 
Blanking — — — — — —
Muting — — — —  —
Interference rejection (2) — —    
Beam coding — —    
(1) The 8-pin M12 for the transmitter is simply for the convenience of specifying two 8-conductor cordsets for the system.
(2) IR is always enabled in 450L PAC models and is not configurable.

You can set the universal plug-in to perform as an emitter or receiver. If pins 4
and 8 of the connectors short-circuit at power-up, the stick behaves like a
transmitter. In this case, the DIP switches have no functionality. Also, the
beam coding functionality is still set at the 450L-E receiver (Rx). For the
confirmation of the beam coding configuration and the pairing procedure, see
Confirmation of a New System Configuration on page 59. If pin 4 and pin 8 of
the plug-in do not short circuit at power-up, the corresponding stick behaves
like a receiver. In this case, the DIP switches have the same functionality as the
catalog number 450L-APR-ED-8 receiver plug-in.

Receiver Plug-in DIP Switch The transmitter plug-ins and the cascading plug-ins do not have DIP switches.
Settings Identify and set the appropriate DIP switches for the desired configuration.
Figure 32 shows DIP switch identification. The number of DIP switches varies
depending on the plug-in type.
Figure 32 - DIP Switch Location at Receiver Plug-in

On
Off

IMPORTANT An error condition occurs (see Status Indicator Error Display on


page 103) if you do not switch the DIP switches to off if the Switch
Function is not defined.
After each reconfiguration of a safety light curtain, test the system for
proper configuration and operation before placing the guarded
machine in operation.

ATTENTION: Confirm every modification of the DIP switches with a


configuration confirmation procedure after the first power-up (see
Confirmation of a New System Configuration on page 59).

After you install the plug-in on the 450L-B safety light curtain transmitter stick
and power-up, you can perform a configuration confirmation (signaled by the
red/ green flashing of the STS status indicator). You can perform the
configuration confirmation without the receiver and transmitter aligned.

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 5 System Configuration

Table 23…Table 29 on page 59 describes the switch functions and default


settings for the receiver plug-ins.

450L-APR-ON-5 Connection Table 23 - Function and Default Settings


Plug-in
Switch Number Switch Function Default Description
450L-E only: Software Off: Disabled
1 Off
configuration On: Enabled
Off: Disabled
2 Low range activation Off On: Enabled
450L-E and 450L PAC only: Off Off: Disabled
3 Activates beam coding On: Enabled
450L-E only: Activates Off: Disabled
4 Off
interference rejection On: Enabled

450L-APR-ED-8 Connection Table 24 shows the function and default settings for the M12 8-pin EDM
Plug-in receiver plug-in (catalog number 450L-APR-ED-8) that inserts in a 450L safety
light curtain transceiver stick (catalog number 450L-APR-BL-5) connection
plug-in.
Table 24 - Function and Default Settings
Switch Number Switch Function Default Description
450L-E only: Software Off: Disabled
1 Off
configuration On: Enabled
Off: Disabled
2 Low range activation Off On: Enabled
450L-E and 450L PAC only: Off Off: Disabled
3 Activates beam coding On: Enabled
450L-E only: Activates Off: Disabled
4 Off
interference rejection On: Enabled
5 Off • DIP 5: Off, DIP 6: Off:
Combination activates the Automatic start (default)
following start modes: • DIP 5: On, DIP 6: Off:
• Automatic Start Manual (re) start
• Manual (re) Start • DIP 5: Off, DIP 6: On:
6 • Manual Cold Start Off Manual cold start
• Manual Start with Off • DIP 5: On, DIP 6: On:
Function Manual start with off
function
Off: Disabled
7 External device monitoring Off On: Enabled
8 — Off —

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 55


Chapter 5 System Configuration

450L-APR-BL-5 Connection Table 25 shows the function and default settings for the M12 5-pin blanking
Plug-in receiver (catalog number 450L-APR-BL-5) plug-in that inserts in a 450L
transceiver stick. Not applicable to 450L PAC safety light curtains.
Table 25 - Function and Default Settings
Switch Number Switch Function Default Description
450L-E only: Software Off: Disabled
1 Off
configuration On: Enabled
Off: Disabled
2 Low range activation Off On: Enabled
450L-E and 450L PAC only: Off Off: Disabled
3 Activates beam coding On: Enabled
450L-E only: Activates Off: Disabled
4 Off
interference rejection On: Enabled
450L-E only: Off: Disabled
5 Off
Teach-in blanking On: Enabled
6 Off • DIP 6: Off, DIP 7: Off:
Reduced resolution
450L-E only: disabled (default)
Combination activates the
following start modes: • DIP 6: Off, DIP 7: On:
Reduced resolution 2
• No Reduced Resolution beam
7 • Reduced Resolution 1 Off • DIP 6: On, DIP 7:Off:
Lens Reduced resolution 1
• Reduced Resolution 2 beam
Lenses
• DIP 6: On, DIP 7:On:
Invalid selection (error)
8 — Off —

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 5 System Configuration

450L-APR-MU-8 Connection Table 26 shows the function and default settings for the M12 8-pin muting
Plug-in receiver plug-in (catalog number 450L-APR-MU-8) that inserts in a 450L safety
light curtain transceiver stick.
Table 26 - Function and Default Settings
Switch Number Switch Function Default Description
450L-E only: Software Off: Disabled
1 Off
configuration On: Enabled
Off: Disabled
2 Low range activation Off On: Enabled
450L-E and 450L PAC only: Off Off: Disabled
3 Activates beam coding On: Enabled
450L-E only: Activates Off: Disabled
4 Off
interference rejection On: Enabled
5 Combination activates one Off • DIP 5: Off, DIP 6: Off:
of the following start Automatic start (default)
modes: • DIP 5: On, DIP 6: Off:
• Automatic Start Manual (re)start
• Manual (re)Start • DIP 5: Off, DIP 6: On:
6 Off Manual cold start
• Manual Cold Start
• DIP 5: On, DIP 6: On:
• Manual Start with Off Manual start with off
Function function
Off: Disabled
7 External device monitoring Off On: Enabled
Off: See blanking modes in
450L-E only: Table 27 on page 58
8 Off
Muting or blanking On: See muting modes in
Table 28 on page 58
450L-E only: Off: Disabled
9 Off
Teach-in blanking On: Enabled
10 Off • DIP 10: Off, DIP 11: Off:
Reduced resolution
Combination activates the disabled (default)
following start modes: • DIP 10: On, DIP 11: Off:
• No Reduced Resolution Reduced resolution 1
• Reduced Resolution 1 beam
11 Lens Off • DIP 10: Off, DIP 11: On:
• Reduced Resolution 2 Reduced resolution 2
Lenses beam
• DIP 10: On, DIP 11:On:
Invalid selection (error)
12 — Off —

For 450L-E safety light curtain only: If you set DIP 8 to off, blanking can be
activated and DIP 9…DIP12 provide a selection of different blanking
configurations, see Table 27 on page 58.
The 450L PAC safety light curtain does not support blanking. DIP switch 8 set to off
in a 450L PAC safety light curtain results in a lockout condition.

If pin 8 is set to on: Muting is active and DIP 9…DIP 12 allow for the selection of
different muting configurations, see Table 28 on page 58.
Table 27 on page 58 shows the function and default settings for the M12 8-pin
muting receiver plug-in (catalog number 450L-APR-MU-8) that inserts in a
450L-E safety light curtain transceiver stick; DIP 8 = off.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 57


Chapter 5 System Configuration

Table 27 - Function and Default Settings


Switch Number Switch Function Default Description
450L-E only: Off: Disabled
9 Off
Teach-in blanking On: Enabled
10 Off • DIP 10: Off, DIP 11: Off:
Combination activates one Reduced resolution
of the following disabled (default)
configurations: • DIP 10: On, DIP 11: Off:
• No reduced resolution Reduced resolution 1 beam
11 • Reduced resolution 1 Off • DIP 10: Off, DIP 11: On:
lens Reduced resolution 2
• Reduced resolution 2 beams
lenses • DIP 10: On, DIP 11: On:
Invalid selection (error)
12 — Off —

Table 28 shows the function and default settings for the M12 8-pin muting
receiver plug-in (catalog number 450L-APR-MU-8) that inserts in a 450L-E or
450L PAC safety light curtain transceiver stick; DIP 8 = on.
Table 28 - Function and Default Settings
Switch Number Switch Function Default Description
9 Off • DIP 9: Off, DIP 10: Off, DIP 11: Off:
10 Off No muting
• DIP 9: Off, DIP 10: On, DIP 11: Off
2L muting sensors that are
connected to connection plug-in
• DIP 9: Off, DIP 10: On, DIP 11: On
2L muting sensors that are
connected to the I/O cascading
450L-E only: plug-in
Combination activates
muting configurations • DIP 9: On, DIP 10: Off, DIP 11: Off
11 Off 2T muting sensors that are
connected to connection plug-in
• DIP 9: On, DIP 10: Off, DIP 11: On
2T muting sensors connected to
cascading plug-in
• DIP 9: On, DIP 10: On, DIP 11: On
4T muting sensors connected to
cascading plug-in
12 — Off —

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 5 System Configuration

450L-APR-UN-8 Connection Table 29 shows the function and default settings for the M12 8-pin muting
Plug-in receiver plug-in (catalog number 450L-APR-UN-8) that inserts in a 450L safety
light curtain transceiver stick.
Table 29 - Function and Default Settings
Switch Number Switch Function Default Description
450L-E only: Software Off: Disabled
1 Off
configuration On: Enabled
Off: Disabled
2 Low range activation Off On: Enabled
450L-E and 450L PAC only: Off Off: Disabled
3 Activates beam coding On: Enabled
450L-E only: Activates Off: Disabled
4 Off
interference rejection On: Enabled
5 Combination activates one Off • DIP 5: Off, DIP 6 Off:
of the following start Automatic start (default)
modes: • DIP 5: On, DIP 6 Off:
• Automatic Start Manual (re)start
• Manual (re)Start • DIP 5: Off, DIP 6 On:
6 Off Manual cold start
• Manual Cold Start
• DIP 5: On, DIP 6 On:
• Manual Start with Off Manual start with off
Function function
Off: Disabled
7 External device monitoring Off On: Enabled
8 — Off —
9 — Off —
10 — Off —
11 — Off —
12 — Off —

For the UNIV plug-in: If pin 4 and pin 8 short circuit (Transmitter mode), then
the DIP switch settings have no impact on the transmitter functionality.

Confirmation of a New
System Configuration IMPORTANT When you operate the receiver stick for the first time (brand new
receiver), the confirmation procedure is not required. The STS status
indicator flashes red/green when a confirmation is required.
System configuration confirmation is necessary when the receiver
stick was previously operated with another configuration or when the
receiver stick was previously operated with another transmitter.
The configuration confirmation procedure is not required if you
exchange the receiver plug-in with a new plug-in with the same plug-in
type and DIP switch settings as the original.
Also, no configuration confirmation procedure is required for a
complete out-of-box pair of 450L safety light curtain transceiver sticks.

Perform a confirmation procedure of a new configuration when you change


DIP switch settings and reinsert the plug-in to the safety light curtain stick.
The STS status indicator flashes 1 Hz red/green to indicate a confirmation
request (Figure 33 on page 60).
Performed this process only once after the first power-up of a plug-in with new
settings. The process is not required at any following power-up except DIP
switch changes.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 59


Chapter 5 System Configuration

Figure 33 - Position of Optical Push Button and Status Indicator


Status Indicator
Optical Push Button

Confirmation Figure 34 shows the configuration timing sequence. Activate the optical push
button two times for 5 seconds with a maximum of 2 seconds between
activations.
Figure 34 - Configuration Process
2s
5s 5s
1 2 4 5
Optical Push Button Activated

Optical Push Button Released


3 6

Confirmation Procedure
To confirm a new configuration:
1. The status indicator STS flashes green/red (1 Hz, one time red, and one
time green per second, 50:50 duty cycle), which indicates that the stick is
in the Configuration mode.
2. Actuate the optical push button for 5 seconds.
3. STS flashes green/red to indicate actuation with a frequency of 10 Hz and
50:50 duty cycle.
4. Once the status indicator STS changes from green/red to green/off,
release the optical push button.
5. A frequency change from 10 Hz to 1 Hz indicates release (status indicator
STS green/off and a 50:50 duty cycle).
6. Within 2 seconds, actuate the optical push button.
7. Status indicator STS indicates the activation by a new green/red
frequency of 10 Hz and a 50% duty cycle.
8. Actuate the optical push button for 5 seconds.
9. Once the status indicator changes from green/red flashing to green/off
flashing, release.
10. After releasing, the status indicator STS is steady green.
If any error occurs in this procedure, the new configuration does not store and
the STS status indicator starts flashing again (1 Hz, green/red, and 50:50 duty
cycle). For example:
• If you release the actuator before the 5 seconds.
• If you do not actuate the actuator within the 2 seconds thereafter.

IMPORTANT Once you complete the configuration confirmation procedure, confirm


that the operating mode changed to the intended configuration.

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 6

Installation and Wiring

ATTENTION: Do not use the GuardShield™ safety light curtain with machines
that cannot stop electrically in an emergency.
Always maintain the required safety distance (see Determine the Safety
Distance on page 62) between the GuardShield safety light curtain and
dangerous machine movement.
Install additional mechanical protective devices if you can reach hazardous
machine elements without passing through the protective field.
Improper installation can result in serious injury.
Never connect the safety outputs (OSSDs) to +24V DC. If the safety outputs
connect to +24V DC, they are in the on-state and cannot stop hazardous
machine/application movements.
Never expose the GuardShield safety light curtain to flammable or explosive
gases. Do not install GuardShield safety light curtains in outdoor or
underwater applications without additional measures.
Regular safety inspections are imperative (see Maintenance on page 109).
Do not open or attempt to repair or modify the GuardShield safety light
curtain. Removal of either of the gray GuardShield safety light curtain end
caps or the transparent front window voids the warranty terms of this
product.

LASER LIGHT CLASS 2 HAZARD: Do not stare into the beam.


The 450L-E and 450L PAC GuardShield safety light curtains are equipped with
an integrated laser alignment aid (see Laser Alignment on page 23).

IMPORTANT Do not insert or remove plug-ins with power applied to the plug-in.
Only use the GuardShield safety light curtain as defined in Product
Overview on page 11.
If you use the device for any other purposes or modify the device in any
way, warranty claims against Rockwell Automation become null and
void.
Installation must be in accordance with this manual and implemented
by qualified personnel exclusively.
A GuardShield safety light curtain system is intended as part of the
safety-related control system of a machine. Before installation, perform
a thorough risk assessment to determine whether the specifications of
this device are suitable for all foreseeable operational and
environmental characteristics of the application.

See Specifications on page 165 for certification information and ratings.


Observe and maintain the requirements that this chapter defines (for example,
power supply, cables, and ambient conditions), to allow for the safety function.

Use appropriate screws, bolts, and/or nuts to mount the sticks and plug-ins to
avoid damage.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 61


Chapter 6 Installation and Wiring

Do not over-torque the mounting hardware:


• For installation of the plug-ins, use a Phillips tip screwdriver for an M2 x
8 Phillips screw. Maximum torque is 0.38 N•m (3.36 lb•in).
• For installation of the standard top/ bottom mounting kit, use a Phillips
tip screwdriver for an M3 x 10 Phillips DIN 965 A screw. Maximum torque
is 0.7 N•m (6.19 lb•in).

Only use the designated mounting holes of the mounting bracket.


Use only fixed, stable, and sturdy mounting posts or frames to mount a 450L-B
GuardShield safety light curtain system.

For the installation of the plug-ins, see Electrical Installation on page 81.

Determine the Safety Mount the safety light curtain with proper safety distance:
Distance • From the point of danger
• From reflective surfaces

To help prevent a person from reaching through the protective field to a


dangerous area (while the machine is still moving), consider both points in an
installation.

The calculation of point one varies depending on the region (country) where
the device operates.

U.S. Safety Distance Formula


Properly calculate this distance, referred to as the safety distance, before you
determine the safety light-curtain protective height and mount the safety light
curtains on the machine. Failure to calculate this safety distance properly can
result in operator injury.

ATTENTION: Mount the GuardShield safety light curtains at a sufficient


distance from the pinch point or point of operation hazard. This distance
helps confirm that the machine stops before a finger, hand, arms, or body
reach the hazard.

Regardless of the calculated safety distance, the protective field of a


GuardShield safety light curtain never mounts closer than 152.4 mm (6 in.)
from the point of operation to the pinch point hazard.
In the United States, two formulas are commonly used to calculate the safety
distance:
• The OSHA formula is the minimum requirement for the calculation of
the safety distance.
• The ANSI formula, the formula we recommend, incorporates additional
factors for consideration when calculating the safety distance.

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 6 Installation and Wiring

OSHA Safety Distance Formula


The OSHA safety distance formula as specified in CFR29 Subpart O1910.217 is
as follows.
Ds = 63 × T

Ds Safety distance in inches (1 in. = 25.4 mm)


63 The OSHA recommended hand speed constant in inches per second
(63 in/s = 1600 mm/s)
Total stop time of all devices in the safety circuit, which is measured
in seconds. This value must include all components that are involved
T to stop the hazardous motion of the machinery. For a mechanical
power press, the stop time is measured at approximately the 90°
position of the crankshaft rotation.

IMPORTANT The T number must include the response times of all devices, including
the response time of the safety light curtain, the safety light curtain
controller (if used), the machine control circuit, and any other devices
that react to stop the hazardous motion of the machinery. Not including
the response time of a device or devices in the stop time calculation
results in insufficient safety distance for the application, which results
in operator injury.

ANSI Safety Distance Formula


The ANSI B11.19 safety distance formula, which is the formula we recommend
for USA, is as follows.
Ds = K × (Tst + Tc + Tt + Tbm) + Dpf

Minimum safety distance between the safe guarding device and the
Ds nearest point of operation hazard (in inches).
Hand-speed constant in inches per second. The ANSI standard value
K is 63 inches per second when the operator begins reaching toward the
point of operation hazard from rest.

IMPORTANT ANSI B11.19 1990 E4.2.3.3.5 states the value of the hand-speed constant
(K) is determined in various studies. Although these studies indicate
speeds of 63 inches/second to over 100 inches/second, they are not
conclusive. The employer can consider all factors, including the
physical ability of the operator, when determining the value of K to be
used.

Stop time of the machine tool that is measured at the final control
Tst element.
Tc Response time of the control system.
Response time of the presence sensing device (safety light curtain)
Tt and its interface, if any. The device manufacturer states this value, or
you can measure it.

IMPORTANT Use a stop time device to measure Tst + Tc + Tr.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 63


Chapter 6 Installation and Wiring

Additional time that is allowed for the brake monitor to compensate


Tbm
for variations in normal stop time.
Depth penetration factor is an added distance to allow for how far
into the protective field an object, such as a finger or hand, can travel
before detection. Dpf relates to the safety light-curtain object
Dpf
sensitivity. Object sensitivity is the smallest diameter object that is
detected anywhere in the sensing field (commonly also known as
resolution).

Example for Dpf

You can approximate the Dpf in a perpendicular safety light curtain


application with object sensitivity (effective resolution) less than 63.5 mm
(2.5 in.):
Dpf (inches) = 3.4 × (Object Sensitivity [inch] – 0.276 [inch]), but not
less than 0.
Table 30 - Depth of Penetration Factor
Description [mm (in.)] Depth Penetration Factor [mm (in.)]
Finger resolution: 14 (0.56) 23.7 (0.935)
Hand resolution: 30 (1.19) 78.1 (3.077)

European Safety Distance Formula


Maintain a safety distance between the safety light curtain and the point of
danger (see Figure 38 on page 66), as described in IEC/TS 62046. This safety
distance helps confirm that you can only reach the point of danger after the
dangerous state of the machine is removed.

The safety distance as defined in EN ISO 13855 and EN ISO 13857 depends on:
• Machine stop time
• Response time of the protective device (safety light curtain + control
circuit)
• Resolution of the safety light curtain
• Approach speed to the danger point
• Position of the AOPD
Figure 35 - Safety Distance from the Point of Danger to the Safety Light Curtain
Safety
Distance

Protective
Height
Point of
danger

To avoid the possibility of standing between the


protective field and the point of operation, ≤ 75 mm
≤75 mm (2.95 in.) (2.95 in.) distance must be maintained.

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 6 Installation and Wiring

How to calculate the Safety Distance (S) for 450L POC safety light curtain
systems according to EN ISO 13855 and EN ISO 13857:
• First, calculate S with the following formula
S = 2000 [mm/s] × T + 8 × (d – 14) [mm]

Where:

Stopping/run-down time of the machine [s] + response time Tt of the


T = safety light curtain [s] + response time of the control circuit [s]
d = Resolution of the safety light curtain [mm]
S = Safety distance [mm]
The reach/approach speed is already included in the formula:
• If the result S is ≤ 500 mm (19.6 in.), then use the determined value as the
safety distance.
• If the result S is > 500 mm (19.6 in.), then recalculate S as follows:
S = 1600 × T + 8 × (d – 14) [mm]
• If the new value S is > 500 mm (19.6 in.), then use the new value as the
minimum safety distance.
• If the new value S is ≤ 500 mm (19.6 in.), then use 500 mm (19.6 in.) as the
safety distance.

EXAMPLE:

Stopping/run-down time of the machine = 290 ms


Response time safety light curtain Tt < 20 ms

Response time of the control circuit = 10 [ms]

T = 290 [ms] + 20 [ms] + 10 [ms] = 320 [ms] = 0.32 [s]


Resolution of the safety light curtain = 14 mm (0.56 in.)

S = 2000 × 0.32 + 8 × (14 – 14) = 640 mm (25.1 in.) S > 500 mm, therefore:

S = 1600 × 0.32 + 8 × (14 – 14) = 512 mm (20.1 in.)

Figure 35 on page 64 also indicates the distance to avoid standing behind the
safety light curtain. If you install the safety light curtain more than 75 mm (2.95
in.) from the machine:
• With auto restart
• Where the dangerous area is not visible from the Reset button, consider
more protective measures (for example, an additional horizontal
installed safety light curtain).

How to calculate the Safety Distance (S) for 450L PAC safety light curtain
systems according to EN ISO 13855 and EN ISO 13857:
• If there are perimeter systems or safety light curtains with a resolution
d > 40 mm (1.57 in.), calculate the safety distance for a vertical mount of
the safety light curtains and horizontal approach, according to the
formula:
S = (1600 x T) + 850 mm (33.46 in.)
See standard EN ISO 13855 (2010) for more detailed information regarding
safety distance and safety heights.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 65


Chapter 6 Installation and Wiring

Figure 36 - Safety Distance from the Point of Danger to the Safety Light Curtain

Minimum Distance from Reflective Surfaces


The infrared light that transmits from the two transceivers can reflect off
shiny surfaces. This condition can result in an object not being detected when
it enters the GuardShield safety light curtain sensing field.

All reflective surfaces and objects (for example, material bins) must, therefore,
be at a minimum distance (A) from the protective sensing field of the system.
The minimum distance (A) depends on the distance (D) between the two
transceivers.
Figure 37 - Minimum Distance A from Reflective Surfaces (Top View)

Figure 38 - Minimum Distance A from Reflective Surfaces (Side View)

To determine the minimum distance from the reflective surfaces:


• Determine the distance D [m] between transmitter and receiver
• Read the minimum distance A [mm] from Figure 39 on page 67

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 6 Installation and Wiring

Figure 39 - Minimum Distance A from Reflective Surfaces (D= Distance between Receiver and
Transmitter)
A [mm]

500

400

300

200

100

D [m]
3 5 10

The effective aperture angle for the 450L safety light curtain system is ± 2.5° at
a mounting distance of ≥ 3.0 m (9.8 ft). Calculate the minimum distance to
reflective surfaces depending on the distance between the transmitter and the
receiver, with an aperture angle of 2.5°.

IMPORTANT Formula: A [mm] = tan 2.5° x D = 43.7 × D [m]


A = Minimum distance to reflective surfaces
D = Distance between transmitter and receiver or take the appropriate
value from Table 31.

Table 31 - Minimum Distance for Various Distances D Between Transmitter and Receiver
Distance between Transmitter and Receiver Minimum Distance A
(Range D) [m (ft)] [mm (in.)]
0.5…3.0 (1.64…9.8) 135 (5.31)
4.0 (13.1) 175 (6.88)
5.0 (16.4) 220 (8.66)
6.0 (19.6) 265 (10.43)
7.0 (22.9) 310 (12.2)
10.0 (32.8) 440 (17.32)

Mirrors You can use the GuardShield safety light curtains with corner mirrors (see
Corner Mirror on page 175). Mirrors are only allowed for applications without
undetected access into the protected area.
Figure 40 - Installation Angle for Mirrors (View from the Top)
Transmitter

Mirror

Installation
Angle (IA)

Dangerous Area

Receiver

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 67


Chapter 6 Installation and Wiring

ATTENTION: When you use mirrors, all sides of the protective field must fulfill
the requirements for minimum safety distance and minimum distance from
the reflective surfaces.
The installation angle (IA) must be between 70°<IA<110° otherwise serious
injury or death can result.
Figure 41 - Possible Misuse of a Mirror

Install and Mount This section describes the preparation, selection, and installation of the
GuardShield safety light curtain system:
• You can use a GuardShield safety light curtain system in all mounting
orientations.
• The GuardShield safety light curtain has two status indicators in each
stick to display the status of the intensity (see Figure 42). One status
indicator refers to the first half of the protective field, the other status
indicator refers to the second half of the protective field. These status
indicators begin to flash green when the receiver sees the infrared light
from the transmitter. The status indicators turn steady green when
optimal alignment is attained. Use these two status indicators as an
alignment aid.
Figure 42 - Status Indicators to Display Intensity

• Mount both sticks so that the distance of the protective field is at or


greater than the calculated safety distance (see Determine the Safety
Distance on page 62).
• Mount both sticks away from any reflective surfaces (see Figure 37 on
page 66).
• Position the sticks parallel to each other and at the same height. Point
The transmitter and receiver connection plug-in locations in the same
direction (Figure 43 on page 69).

68 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 6 Installation and Wiring

Figure 43 - Correct Positioning and Incorrect Positioning of Transmitter and Receiver Sticks
Power

Power Power Power


• Position the optical lens system of transmitter and receiver stick in exact
opposition to each other.
• Take suitable measures to attenuate vibration.
• Mount the safety light curtain so you cannot reach the hazardous point
cannot from below, above, or behind the safety light curtain and that the
safety light curtain cannot be repositioned (see Correct Installation on
page 70 and Incorrect Installation on page 70).
• Connect both sticks.
• Turn on power to the GuardShield safety light curtain system.
• If the STS status indicator at the receiver stick displays a configuration
change (flashing red/green), confirmation is required, see Confirmation
of a New System Configuration on page 59.
• Watch the two regional intensity status indicators on the sticks while you
rotate the transmitter and receiver sticks. Find the point where the two
indicators for the intensity state illuminate to a steady green condition.

• Determine the maximum left and right adjustment angles and position
each unit in the center. Tighten all hardware until the alignment
(intensity) indicators do not flash.
• Cycle power to confirm that the system powers up, goes to the on-state
(STS status indicator steady green) and the intensity status indicators
show steady green.
An external laser alignment tool (catalog number 440L-ALAT) and a dedicated
mounting bracket (catalog number 450L-ALAT-C) are offered as accessories
(see Alignment Tool and Bracket on page 178). Use these items for alignment of
the 450L-B safety light curtain for larger operating distances or when you use
corner mirrors in the application.

IMPORTANT If you configure EDM or manual start functions through DIP switch
settings, confirm that the proper receiver wire connections are made.
Always follow the minimum operating distance (see Table 73 on page 165).
Stable operation is not guaranteed when the device operates below the
specified value. Position of the transmitter and the receiver stick that is closer
than specified results in an interruption of the protective field and switches off
the two OSSDs.

IMPORTANT We recommend that you only use the mounting brackets that we offer.
Take appropriate measures to dampen vibration if the vibration and
shock requirements are above the specified values and test conditions.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 69


Chapter 6 Installation and Wiring

Correct Installation
Figure 44 - Hazardous Machine Parts Unreachable without Passing Through the Protective Field

ATTENTION: Install the GuardShield safety light curtain so access to the


hazard is only possible through the sensing field of the GuardShield safety
light curtain. Auxiliary safe guarding can be required with the GuardShield
safety light curtain to meet this requirement.
Figure 45 - Pass Through Prevention (Cannot Step between Protective Field and Hazardous Machine
Parts)

Incorrect Installation
Figure 46 - Hazardous Machine Parts Reachable without Passing Through the Protective Field

70 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 6 Installation and Wiring

Figure 47 - Can Step between Protective Field and Hazardous Machine Parts

Mount the GuardShield safety light curtain at the proper distance from the
point of operation hazard. This distance is referred to as the safety distance. If
the safety distance calculation is such that a person can step between a
vertically mounted safety light curtain and the machine hazard, more
protective measures are required.
Figure 48 - Safety Distance Definition
Safety
Middle of Depth of Distance Ds
Protective Field Point of Operation

Top of Tool

Machine
Protective Height Stop Time

Middle of Depth of
Protective Field

IMPORTANT Confirm that you cannot stand between the protective field and the
point of operation (hazard). EN ISO 13855 requires a minimum distance
(X) at an installation height of 300 mm (11.9 in.). Check EN ISO 13855 for
other installation heights.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 71


Chapter 6 Installation and Wiring

Mount Multiple 450L GuardShield Safety Light Curtains


When two or more 450L safety light curtain pairs mount closely, the following
can happen.
1. Optical interference: The receiver of one pair sees infrared light from the
transmitter of another pair. Optical interference between neighboring
450L safety light curtain systems can affect safety light curtain system
reliability by sporadically switching off the OSSDs.
2. Optical crosstalk (see Figure 50 on page 73): The receiver of one pair
communicates continuously with the transmitter of another pair. Optical
crosstalk between neighboring 450L safety light curtain systems causes
holes in the protective field and is therefore an unsafe installation.
Optical crosstalk can only occur if:
a. Both systems have the same resolution and the same height of the
protective field.
b. The height of the protective field is smaller than the minimum
separation distance (S) provided in Table 14 on page 45.
c. The space between both pairs is smaller than the minimum separation
distance S provided in Table 14 on page 45.

ATTENTION: Cross talk between adjacent installed pairs can cause an unsafe
situation.

Measures to avoid optical interference or optical cross talk are:


1. Minimum installation distance (S) between adjacent installed pairs (see
Table 14 on page 45).
2. Installation of optical barriers (see Figure 51 on page 74).

For 450L-E safety light curtains, the beam code function (see Beam Coding on
page 27) is also a measure to help prevent optical cross talk. The beam code
function also reduces, but does not eliminate, the probability for optical
interferences. You can also use interference rejection, see Interference
Rejection on page 28.
Figure 49 - Two Adjacent Installed Pairs without Optical Crosstalk
Rx (2)

Tx (2)

Rx (1)
Tx (1) Tx (1) <-> Rx (1)
Tx (2) <-> Rx (2)

72 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 6 Installation and Wiring

Figure 50 - Two Adjacent Installed Pairs with Optical Crosstalk


Rx (2)

Tx (2)

Tx (1) <-> Rx (2) Rx (1)


Tx (1) Tx (2) <-> Rx (1)

Figure 51 on page 74 shows a number of installation techniques to stop optical


interference or optical crosstalk between adjacent safety light curtains:
• Check that you can reduce the maximum operation range (see
Low Operating Range on page 27).
• Invert adjacent pairs.
• Install mechanical (optical) barriers to help prevent optical interference
(Figure 51 on page 74).
• For 450L-E safety light curtains only: Check if the beam code feature is a
possible option (see Beam Coding on page 27).

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 73


Chapter 6 Installation and Wiring

Figure 51 - Optical Barriers (Ob) Are Required for Adjacent Safety Light Curtains Installations
Horizontal Adjacent Pairs

Ob

Vertical
Adjacent Pairs Ob

74 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 6 Installation and Wiring

Figure 52 - Invert Adjacent Pairs

Rx Tx Tx Rx

Power Power
plug-in plug-in
bottom top

Power Power
plug-in plug-in
face face top
bottom

Rx Tx

Tx Rx

1. RX of the first and Rx of the second pair are not next to each other.
2. The first pair is face up, the second pair is face down.
3. Use reduce range. Turn on the second DIP switch on the LLC.

Invert the sticks in adjacent pairs such that the top and bottom of the sticks are
opposite. The more accurate the alignment of 450L safety light curtains, the
less probability there is of cross-talk/optical interference.

The transceiver architecture of safety light curtains does not allow a


back-to-back installation of adjacent transmitters as is common with safety
light curtain systems with a pure transmitter and receiver architecture.

Depending on the installed distance, you can use the reduced operating
functionality (see Low Operating Range on page 27) instead of an optical
barrier to stop optical interference of adjacent GuardShield safety light curtain
systems.

For 450L-E safety light curtains only: To stop optical interference between
neighbor 450L-E safety light curtain systems can cause a safety issue, in
addition of an optical barrier, you can select the beam code feature (see Beam
Coding on page 27). Beam code changes the pulse pattern of infrared light that
a 450L-E safety light curtain stick emits.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 75


Chapter 6 Installation and Wiring

450L Safety Light Curtain with Interference Rejection


450L PAC safety light curtains have permanently enabled interference
rejection. This feature is a configurable option for 450L-E safety light curtains.
This scheme allows multiple 450L PAC safety light curtain systems to mount
next to others or on the same plane. Where only two pairs mount, enable only
one beam code for only one of the pairs. Position the pairs with both
transmitter (Tx) sticks back-to-back or both receiver (Rx) sticks back-to-back,
as shown in Figure 53. If both pairs power up simultaneously without this
orientation, the Rx of one system can attempt to pair with the Tx of the other
system, which causes both sticks to prompt for a teach-in.
Figure 53 - Mounting Arrangement for 450L PAC and 450L-E with Interference Rejection
System 1 System 2 System 3 System 4 System 5 System 6
(Coding Off) (Coding On) (Coding Off) (Coding On) (Coding Off) (Coding On)

Rx Tx Tx Rx Rx Tx Tx Rx Rx Tx Tx Rx
0 0

Mounting Brackets Standard Top/Bottom Mounting Kit


The GuardShield safety light curtain can mount using right angle brackets that
attach to the end caps of both the transmitter and receiver sticks. Each stick
comes with a pair of end cap mounting brackets (see Figure 54).

Use a Phillips screwdriver for M3 x 10 Phillips DIN 965 A screws to install the
standard top/bottom mounting kit. Torque above the maximum 0.7 N•m
(6.19 lb•in) can damage the safety light curtain.

The top/bottom mounting kit allows a rotation of ±20% of the GuardShield


safety light curtain aluminum profile.

The length of the transceiver stick and the vibration and shock conditions of
the application often require additional side mounting brackets.
Figure 54 - 450L-AM-TBM Standard Mounting Bracket Kit [mm (in.)]

43
(1.69)

42.5 (1.67)
24.9(0.98)
8
)
0.16
R4 (

(0.35)
15
30 (0.59)
(1.18) 8(0.35)
6(0.24)

76 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 6 Installation and Wiring

Mounting of each stick requires two M6 DIN 912 screws (not provided).

Figure 55 shows different cable guide options. The bend radius of the plug-in
pig tail cable is small enough so that the cable can route at a 90° angle. The
minimum bend radius is specified in Figure 79 on page 99.
Figure 55 - Connection Cable Guide Options

Figure 56 and Figure 57 show possible 450L safety light curtain attachments to
extruded aluminum profiles with the standard top/bottom mounting bracket.
Figure 56 - 450L Safety Light Curtain Mounted on an Extruded Aluminum Profile

Figure 57 - 450L Safety Light Curtain Mounted Backwards

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 77


Chapter 6 Installation and Wiring

Side Mounting Bracket


The side mounting bracket (Cat No. 450L-AM-SM, contains two brackets)
allows the snap-in GuardShield safety light curtain profile to rotate ± 5° (see
Figure 58).
Figure 58 - Side Mounting Bracket (mm [in.])
Side Mounting 15 (0.59)
10 (0.39)

3)
0.1
3(
R3.
32.5 (1.28)

10 (0.39)

13 (0.51)
12 (0.47)
55 (2.17)
60 (2.36)
Back Mounting
R3.50

87 ( 3.43)
(0.14

60 (2.36)
)
23.5 (0.93)

55 (2.17)
13 (0.51)

6.6 (0.26) 6.6 (0.26)

Figure 59 - Side Mounting Bracket with Attached 450L Safety Light Curtain [mm (in.)]

30
(1.18)

Figure 60 - Side Mounting Bracket with Attached 450L Safety Light Curtain on Extruded Aluminum
Profile

You require a minimum of two M6 DIN 912 screws (not provided) to mount
each bracket properly.

78 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 6 Installation and Wiring

IMPORTANT Use side mounting brackets and/or the top/bottom mounting kits in
vibration applications.
Use additional side mounting brackets in vibration applications for protective
heights of 1050 mm (41.3 in.) and larger. Position and mount the additional
bracket in the middle of each stick.
Table 32 - Number of Side Mounting Brackets without Top/Bottom Brackets
Stick Length [mm (in.)] Number of Side Mounting Brackets Per Stick
150 (5.9) 1
300…900 (11.8…35.43) 2
1050…1950 (41.34…76.77) 2 (3 for vibration applications)

Table 33 - Number of Side Mounting Brackets and Top/Bottom Brackets


Stick Length [mm (in.)] Number of Side Mounting Brackets Per Stick
150…900 (5.9…35.43) 0
1050…1950 (41.34…76.77) 1 for vibration applications

You require a hex tip screwdriver for M6 screws to mount the side mounting
kit.

ATTENTION: You can damage the safety light curtain if you exceed the
maximum 11 N•m (97.36 lb•in).
Do not clamp the gray plastic end cap (see Figure 61).
Figure 61 - Correct and Incorrect Positioning of the Side Mounting Bracket

Position the side mounting brackets close to the gray end cap. Position
additional brackets so that the distance between each bracket is equal
(symmetric). You can also install catalog number 450L-AD-OID optical
interface device (see Optical Interface Device (OID) on page 106) with the side
mounting brackets.

Shock Mounting Kit


We offer special shock mounting brackets for applications that exhibit shock
and vibration (Figure 62 on page 80). For vertical installations, use the
vibration damper (catalog number 445L-AF6142) with the standard L-shaped
top/bottom mounting bracket and side mounting bracket.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 79


Chapter 6 Installation and Wiring

Figure 62 - 445L-AF6142 Shock Mount Brackets [mm (in.)]

M 6x25 Socket Head Cap Screw, Fully Threaded

M 6x6.1/14 Lock Washer

20 20
(0.79) (0.79) dia. Vibration Damper

18 M6
(0.71)

M 6x6.1/14 Lock Washer

Replacement Mounting Kit


The replacement mounting kit provides an easier mechanical conversion from
installed safety light curtains to GuardShield safety light curtains if previous
mounting holes are used. The GuardShield safety light curtain transceiver
stick can directly mount to the replacement kit bracket. You can also use the
replacement kit bracket with the default mounting kit (catalog number
450L-AM-TBM) or the optional side mounting kit (catalog number
450L-AM-SM). See Figure 64 on page 81.
Figure 63 - 450L-AM-RK Replacement Mounting Kit [mm (in.)]
46.9 54
(1.85) (2.11)
25 11
(0.43) Adjustable 45
(0.98) 135 (5.31)
(1.77)
20 7
(0.79) (0.30)

28.7
(1.13)

7
(0.30)

120 (4.72) 26.7 (1.05)


20 (0.79)

53.11
(2.09)
8.5 12.5
(0.33) (0.49) 6
(0.23)

110 (4.33)
20 (0.79)
10
(0.39)
46
(1.81)

80 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 6 Installation and Wiring

Figure 64 - Replacement Kit with 450L-AM-TBM Default L-bracket and 450L-AM-SM Side Mounting
Bracket [mm (in.)]
450L-AM-SM 450L-AM-SM

Electrical Installation
ATTENTION: Remove power from the entire machine/system line.

If you do not remove power, the machine system can inadvertently start while
you connect the devices.

ATTENTION: Confirm that the entire system power is disconnected during the
electrical installation.

Plug-ins
To assemble a 450L safety light curtain system, you require two 450L safety
light curtain sticks (two 450L-B sticks, two 450L-E sticks, or two 450L PAC
sticks) — one transmitter and one receiver plug-in. Instead of one transmitter
and one receiver plug-in, you can use two universal plug-ins. Unpack the
plug-ins and set the DIP switches according to the required functional
settings. Remove the red slot cover from the 450L safety light curtain stick and
insert the connection plug-in. Remove the gray slot cover from the 450L-E or
450L PAC safety light curtain to insert a cascading plug-in, if necessary.

IMPORTANT The connection and the cascading plug-ins are mechanically coded. Do
not attempt to insert a connection plug-in into the slot for the
cascading plug-in and vice versa. If you feel resistance when you insert
a plug-in into the safety light curtain, immediately remove the plug-in
and confirm the plug-in is the correct type/end.
Do not insert plug-ins more than 100 times in one GuardShield safety
light curtain stick.

ATTENTION: To avoid pollution or contamination, install a plug-in into a stick


in a dry and clean area. Confirm that the rubber seal at the plug-in does not
get out of place when you insert the plug-in in the safety light curtain.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 81


Chapter 6 Installation and Wiring

Plug-in Installation
To maintain the IP65 rating, fully insert the slot covers into the safety light
curtain. If you remove the slot cover, replace the cover with a plug-in and
properly insert into the safety light curtain. Figure 65 shows examples of
correct and incorrect installation.
Figure 65 - Plug-in Installation Examples

Correct Incorrect

Cap fully seated Cap missing

Gasket in groove (no nicks, splits, or flat spots) Gasket mis-located

Fully seated, screws tight Screws not torqued

Transmitter Plug-in
Figure 66 shows the plug-ins that can make a transceiver a transmitter.
Table 34…Table 36 on page 83 show the pinout connections for each plug-in.
Figure 66 - Transmitter Plug-ins
Transmitter Receiver

Plug-in:
450L-APT-PW-5
450L-APT-PW-8
450L-APU-UN-8

82 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 6 Installation and Wiring

Table 34 - Pin Assignment (Cat. No. 450L-APT-PW-5)


Face View of Plug M12 5-pin View Pin No. Signal Transmitter
1 24V DC
5
2 2 No connection
3 0V (ground)
1
4 No connection
3
4 5 Functional earth FE

Table 35 - Pin Assignment (Cat. No. 450L-APT-PW-8)


Face View of Plug M12 8-pin View Pin No. Signal Transmitter
1 Do not connect
2 +24V DC
3 2 3 Functional earth FE
8 1 4 Do not connect
4
5 Do not connect
7
5 6 6 Auxiliary output (lockout stick) (on = 24V DC)
7 0V (GND)
8 Do not connect

Receiver Plug-in
Any receiver plug-in type works with any transmitter plug-in type and vice
versa (see Figure 66 on page 82).
Table 36 - Pin Assignment (Cat. Nos. 450L-APR-ON-5 and 450L-APR-BL-5)
Receiver Bottom Plug-in Face View View Pin No. Signal Receiver
of M12 5-pin (DC Micro) Plug
1 +24V DC
2 2 OSSD1
5
3 0V (GND)
1 4 OSSD2
3
4 5 Functional earth FE

Table 37 - Pin Assignment (Cat. No. 450L-APR-ED-8)


Receiver Bottom Plug-in Face View View Pin No. Signal Receiver
of M12 8-pin (DC Micro) Plug
1 Auxiliary output (OSSD emulation)
2 +24V DC
3 Functional earth FE
3 2
8 1
4 EDM (Input) (1)
4 5 OSSD1
5
7 6 OSSD2
6
7 0V (GND)

8 Start (1)

(1) If set with DIP switches.

Table 38 on page 66 shows a configuration for either no muting, or for muting


sensors that connect at the cascading plug-in (catalog number
450L-APC-IO-8).

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 83


Chapter 6 Installation and Wiring

Table 38 - Pin Assignment (Cat. No. 450L-APR-MU-8)


Receiver Bottom Plug-in Face View View Pin No. Signal Receiver
of M12 8-pin (DC Micro) Plug
1 Auxiliary output (OSSD emulation)
2 +24V DC
3 Functional earth FE
3 2 4 EDM (Input) (1)
8 1
5 OSSD1
4
7 6 OSSD2
5 6 7 0V (GND)

8 Start (1)/mute dependent override

(1) If set with DIP switches.

Table 39 shows a configuration (450L-E safety light curtains only) for two-
sensor muting that connects at the connection plug-in (catalog number
450L-APR-MU-8).

ATTENTION: The auxiliary output is only a status output for diagnosis


purposes to connect, for example, an indicator lamp. Do not use this output
for safety purposes.

Table 39 - Pin Assignment (Cat. No. 450L-APR-MU-8) for Two-sensor Muting


Receiver Bottom Plug-in Face View View Pin No. Signal Receiver
of M12 8-pin (DC Micro) Plug
1 Sensor 1
2 +24V DC
3 Functional earth FE
3 2 4 Sensor 2
8 1
5 OSSD1
4
7
6 OSSD2
5 6 7 0V (GND)

8 Start (1)/mute dependent override

(1) If set with DIP switches.

ATTENTION: The auxiliary output is only a status output for diagnosis


purposes to connect, for example, an indicator lamp. Do not connect this
output to fulfill safety functions.

84 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 6 Installation and Wiring

Table 40 - Pin Assignment (Cat. No. 450L-APU-UN-8)


Receiver Bottom Plug-in Face View View Pin No. Signal Transmitter Signal Receiver
of M12 8-pin (DC Micro) Plug
Auxiliary output (OSSD
1 Do not connect emulation)
2 +24V DC +24V DC
3 2 3 Functional earth FE Functional earth FE
8 1
(1)
4 EDM (Input) (2)
4
7 5 Do not connect OSSD1
5 6 6 Auxiliary output (Lockout) OSSD2
7 0V (GND) 0V (GND)
8 (1) (2)

(1) Pin 4 connected to pin 8 (short circuit).


(2) If set with DIP switches.

IMPORTANT If pin 4 connects to pin 8, the corresponding 450L safety light curtain
stick acts like a transmitter.

Cascading
You can insert the cascading plug-in into a 450L-E POC or 450L PAC safety
light curtain transceiver that operates as a transmitter (see Table 41) or as a
receiver (see Table 42 on page 86…Table 46 on page 87)
Table 41 - Pin Assignment of M12 8-pin Plug-in (Cat. No. 450L-APC-IO-8), 450L-E POC or 450L PAC
Safety Light Curtain Operates as Rx
Receiver Bottom Plug-in Face View View Pin No. Signal Receiver
of M12 8-pin (DC Micro) Plug
1 No connection
2 +24V DC
2 3 3 Functional earth FE
1 8
4 No connection
4
5 No connection
7
6 5 6 No connection
7 0V (GND)
8 No connection

The 450L-APC-IO-8 cascading plug-in that connects to a GuardShield safety


light curtain transceiver that operates as a transmitter allows the cascading of
an additional GuardShield safety light curtain transceiver that operates as a
transmitter (see Cascading on page 43). However, in a cascaded system for the
transceiver that works as a transmitter, you can use (not required) the
450L-APC-IO-8 cascading plug-ins (see Figure 28 on page 46).

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 85


Chapter 6 Installation and Wiring

Table 42 - Pin Assignment of Plug-in M12 8-pin (Cat. No. 450L-APC-IO-8), 450L-E POC or 450L PAC
Safety Light Curtain Operates as Rx (1)
Receiver Bottom Plug-in Face View View Pin No. Signal Receiver
of M12 8-pin (DC Micro) Plug
1 No connection
2 +24V DC
3 Functional earth FE
2 3
1 8 4 No connection
4 5 OSSD in 1
7 6 OSSD in 2
6 5
7 0V (GND)

8 Not connected

(1) Default DIP switch connection plug-in setting.

For most DIP switch configurations, the catalog number 450L-APC-IO-8


cascading plug-in allows the cascading of an additional safety light curtain.
There is no DIP switch that enables the cascading option. For some DIP switch
settings that enable muting functionality, use the pins of the catalog number
450L-APC-IO-8 plug-in for the connection of muting sensors. In those cases,
the cascading feature is not enabled (see Table 43 and Table 44).
Table 43 - Pin Assignment of the Cascading Plug-in M12 8-pin (Cat. No. 450L-APC-IO-8), 450L-E
Safety Light Curtain Operates as Rx, Two-sensor Muting (1)
Receiver Bottom Plug-in Face View Pin No. Signal Receiver
View of M12 8-pin (DC Micro) Plug
1 MFO out
2 +24V DC
3 Functional earth FE
2
1
3
8
4 Not connected
4
5 Muting Sensor S1 In
7 6 Muting Sensor S2 In
6 5
7 0V (GND)

8 Muting Lamp

(1) DIP switch connection is set for muting two sensors, muting sensors connect to the cascade plug-in, see Table 28 on
page 58.

Table 44 - Pin Assignment of the Cascading Plug-in M12 8-pin (Cat. No. 450L-APC-IO-8)nto 450L-E
Safety Light Curtain, Four-sensor Muting (1)
Receiver Bottom Plug-in Face View View Pin No. Signal Receiver
of M12 8-pin (DC Micro) Socket
1 Muting Sensor S3 In
2 +24V DC
3 Functional earth FE
2
1
3
8
4 Muting Sensor S4 In
4
5 Muting Sensor S1 In
7 6 Muting Sensor S2 In
6 5
7 0V (GND)

8 Muting Lamp

(1) DIP switch connection plug-in is set for muting four sensors, see Table 28 on page 58.

86 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 6 Installation and Wiring

Transmitter Cable Connection


Depending on the selected plug-in, the GuardShield safety light curtain
transmitter plug-in has either a 5-pin or 8-pin M12 (DC micro) plug connector.
Connection cable accessories are offered from 2…30 m (6.6…98 ft) lengths.

You can use all 450L safety light curtain models with 5-pin M12 QD plug-in
(catalog number 450L-APT-PW-5) with ArmorBlock® Guard I/O™ connectivity
or GuardLink® systems.
Table 45 - Pin Assignment of Cable to M12 5-pin Tx Bottom Plug-in (Cat. No. 450L-APT-PW-5)
Transmitter Connection Cable Face Color
Pin No. Signal Transmitter
View of M12 5-pin (DC Micro) Socket (Cat. No. 889D-F5BC-x) (1)
Brown 1 +24V DC
2
5 White 2 Not connected
Blue 3 0 (GND)
1
Black 4 Not connected
3
4 Gray 5 Functional earth FE
(1) x = 2 [2 m (6.6 ft)], 5 [5 m (16.4 ft)], 10 [10 m (32.8 ft)], 15 [15 m (49.2 ft)], 20 [20 m (65.6 ft), or 30 [30 m (98.4 ft)] available
lengths.

IMPORTANT The transmitter itself is not expected to connect to the ArmorBlock


Guard I/O module or a GuardLink tab. Consider a separate connection
cable or use the 5-pin T-connector for implementation of a transmitter
(see T-connector on page 95).

Table 46 - Pin Assignment of Cable to M12 8-pin Tx Bottom Plug-in (Cat. No. 450L-APT-PW-8)
Transmitter Connection Cable Face Color
Pin No. Signal Transmitter
View of M12 8-pin (DC Micro) Socket (Cat. No. 889D-F8AB-x) (1)
White 1 Do not connect
Brown 2 +24V DC
Green 3 Functional earth FE
Yellow 4 Do not connect
2 3
1 8 Gray 5 Do not connect
4 Auxiliary output (lockout stick)
7
Pink 6 (24V = normal operation,
5 0V = lockout stick)
6
Blue 7 0V (GND)

Red 8 Do not connect

(1) x = 2 [2 m (6.6 ft)], 5 [5 m (16.4 ft)], 10 [10 m (32.8 ft)], 15 [15 m (49.2 ft)], 20 [20 m (65.6 ft), or 30 [30 m (98.4 ft)] available
lengths.

Receiver Cable Connection


Depending on the selected plug-in, the GuardShield safety light curtain
receiver plug-in has either a 5-pin or 8-pin M12 (DC micro) connector (plug).
We offer connection cable accessories from 2…30 m (6.6…98 ft) lengths.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 87


Chapter 6 Installation and Wiring

Table 47 - Pin Assignment of Cable to M12 5-pin Rx Plug-in (Cat. No. 450L-APR-ON-5 or
450L-APR-BL-5)
Receiver Connection Cable Face View Color
Pin No. Signal Transmitter
of M12 5-pin (DC Micro) Socket (Cat. No. 889D-F5BC-x) (1)
Brown 1 +24V DC
2
5 White 2 OSSD1
Blue 3 0V (GND)
1 Black 4 OSSD2
3
4 Gray 5 Functional earth FE

(1) x = 2 [2 m (6.6 ft)], 5 [5 m (16.4 ft)], 10 [10 m (32.8 ft)], 15 [15 m (49.2 ft)], 20 [20 m (65.6 ft), or 30 [30 m (98.4 ft)] available
lengths.

Table 48 - Pin Assignment of Cable to M12 8-pin Rx Plug-in (Cat. No. 450L-APR-ED-8 or
450L-APR-MU-8)
Receiver Connection Cable Face View Color
Pin No. Signal Receiver
of M12 8-pin (DC Micro) Socket (Cat. No. 889D-F8AB-x)(1)
Auxiliary output
White 1 (OSSD high = 24V)
Brown 2 +24V DC
2 3 Green 3 Functional earth FE
8
EDM (Input) (2)
1 Yellow 4
4 Gray 5 OSSD1
7
5 Pink 6 OSSD2
6
Blue 7 0V (GND)

Red 8 Start (2)

(1) x = 2 [2 m (6.6 ft)], 5 [5 m (16.4 ft)], 10 [10 m (32.8 ft)], 15 [15 m (49.2 ft)], 20 [20 m (65.6 ft), or 30 [30 m (98.4 ft)] available
lengths.
(2) If set with DIP switches.

ATTENTION: The auxiliary output is only a status output for diagnosis


purposes to connect, for example, an indicator lamp. Do not connect this
output to fulfill safety functions.

Table 49 - Pin Assignment of Cable to M12 8-pin Universal Plug-in (Tx or Rx)
(Cat. No. 450L-APU-UN-8)
Connection Cable Face View of Color
M12 8-pin (DC Micro) Socket (Cat. No. 889D-F8AB-x)(1) Pin No. Signal Transmitter Signal Receiver

Auxiliary output
White 1 — (OSSD high = 24V)
Brown 2 +24V DC +24V DC
Green 3 Functional earth FE Functional earth FE
(2)
2 3 Yellow 4 EDM (Input) (3)
1 8
Gray 5 Do not connect OSSD1
4 Auxiliary output
7 (Lockout) (24V =
Pink 6 OSSD2
6 5 normal operation,
0V = lockout)
Blue 7 0V (GND) 0V (GND)

Red 8 (2) (3)

(1) x = 2 [2 m (6.6 ft)], 5 [5 m (16.4 ft)], 10 [10 m (32.8 ft)], 15 [15 m (49.2 ft)], 20 [20 m (65.6 ft), or 30 [30 m (98.4 ft)] available
lengths.
(2) Pin 4 connected to pin 8 (short circuit).
(3) If set with DIP switches.

88 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 6 Installation and Wiring

Cascading Cable Connection


The pin assignment for the cable that connects to a cascading plug-in (catalog
number 450L-APC-IO-8) depends on if the cascading plug-in is inserted in a
450L-E safety light curtain transceiver stick working as a transmitter or as a
receiver. Assignment also depends on the DIP switch settings on the Rx
plug-in.
Table 50 - Pin Assignment of Cable to M12 8-pin I/O Cascading Plug-in (Cat. No. 450L-APC-IO-8)
Connection Cable Face View Color Signal
Pin No. Signal Receiver (2)
of M12 8-pin (DC Micro) Plug (Cat. No. 889D-M8AB-x)(1) Transmitter
White 1 — Muting sensor S3 in
Brown 2 +24V DC +24V DC
Green 3 Functional earth FE Functional earth FE
3 2
8 1 Yellow 4 — Muting sensor S4 in
4 Gray 5 — Muting sensor S1 in
7 Pink 6 — Muting sensor S2 in
5 6 Blue 7 0V (GND) 0V (GND)

Red 8 — Muting lamp

(1) x = 2 [2 m (6.6 ft)], 5 [5 m (16.4 ft)], 10 [10 m (32.8 ft)] for the desired length.
(2) 4-sensor muting, if set with DIP switches.

Power Supply
The external voltage supply (+24V DC) must meet the requirements of
IEC 61496-1. Pay special attention to the following requirements:
• The power supply must bridge a short-term power failure of 20 ms
(according to IEC 60204-1).
• The maximum deviation of the voltage levels is 24V DC ±15%.
• The power supply is protected against overload (use NEC Class 2 or fuse
with 4 A in the 24V DC circuit).
• Provide the safety light curtain devices with a 24V DC PELV or SELV
power supply that conforms to the requirements of 414-3 or
IEC 60364-4-41. These provisions are taken to maintain that, even if an
internal fault occurs, the voltage at the outgoing terminals cannot exceed
60V DC.

To comply with UL restrictions, GuardShield safety light curtain sticks are


powered by DC sources whose secondary circuits have double insulation or
reinforced insulation to isolate them from the primary circuit. The DC power
supply must satisfy the requirements for National Electric Code (NEC) Class 2.

The following are Rockwell Automation power supplies that are NEC Class 2
and PELV compliant. These devices also meet the isolation and output hold-off
time requirements of two GuardShield safety light curtain transceiver sticks
(GuardShield safety light curtain outputs not loaded):
• 2080-PS120-240V AC
• 1606-XLP15E
• 1606-XLP30E
• 1606-XLP50E
• 1606-XLP50EZ
• 1606-XLP72E
• 1606-XLP95E
• 1606-XLSDNET4

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 89


Chapter 6 Installation and Wiring

Grounding
There are two types of recommended grounding for 450L safety light curtains:
• Protective earth (PE)
• Functional earth (FE)

Protective earth is intended to help protect personnel from electric shock.


Protective earth is also known as dirty earth as it can contain many types of
noise transients and stray currents. The 24V common side of the 24V power
supply must connect to protective earth at one location.

Functional earth is intended to reduce the high frequency (RF) noise and is
also known clean earth. The functional earth must carry only returning RF
noise currents. Ground schemes must include a functional earth ground to
minimize common mode disturbances that were capacitively coupled between
cables, transients on the 24V common, or radiated noise. Functional earth
must be separate from other earths and must connect to protective earth at
one point.

The 450L safety light curtain plug-in modules have a pin that is labeled
functional earth and a pin that is labeled 0V (GND). The 0V (GND) must
connect to the 24V common. At some point, the 24V Com connects to
protective earth. In the absence of electrical noise, the functional earth can
connect to 24V Com or directly to protective earth point. In the presence of
electrical noise, the functional earth connection becomes critical; the
connection must return the noise to its source in as short a distance as
possible.

Figure 67 shows the symbols that designate functional and protective earth
grounds.
Figure 67 - Earth Symbols

Functional earth Protective Earth

External Device Monitoring (EDM) Connection


The External Device Monitor (EDM) describes the EDM feature. Perform the
EDM function with the receiver plug-ins according to Table 20 on page 53 and
Table 21 on page 53.
Figure 68 - Connect the Contact Elements to the EDM Input
Tx Rx

24V DC
K1

K2

P4

K1
P4 P5 0V
24V DC
K1 K2 0V
P5 K2

90 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 6 Installation and Wiring

IMPORTANT EDM function is not available for GuardShield safety light curtain with
receiver M12 5-pin plug-in (ArmorBlock Guard I/O connectivity).
Surge suppression elements are often required for the contactors,
depending on the contactor.

Restart Button
Start Modes on page 25 describes the options for the individual start modes.
Figure 69 - Connect the Restart Button to Pin 8
Tx Rx

Rb
P8
24V DC

Press the Start button a minimum of 50 ms. The maximum time for accepting
the start is 5 seconds. The start reacts on the falling edge of the start pulse.

If there is a manual start, the Start button must be outside the hazardous area
so a person working inside the hazardous area cannot operate the button.
Manual start is not available in GuardShield safety light curtains with 5-pin
M12 QD connection plug-ins (ArmorBlock Guard I/O connectivity).

IMPORTANT Start is not available for GuardShield safety light curtain with M12 5-pin
plug-in (ArmorBlock, Guard I/O connectivity).
You can also use the Start button to reset the system if there is a
lockout. The stick performs a manual start if you press the button a
minimum of 10 seconds and not longer than 20 seconds.

For more information, see Grounding on page 90.

OSSD Output OSSD Signal Processing


The dangerous movement of the machine must reach a safe state at any time if
at least one of the two OSSDs switches off (0V).

In the application, the signals of both OSSDs must process separately. Both
signals must always connect to either a safety controller, safety relay, or safety
contactors. When you use safety contactors (positively guided contactors),
verify of the status of each (see External Device Monitoring (EDM) Connection
on page 90, Figure 68 on page 90, and Figure 70 on page 92).

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 91


Chapter 6 Installation and Wiring

OSSD Restart Time (from Off to On)


The times that are necessary to switch on the OSSDs after clearance of an
interruption of the protective field if automatic reset is as follows:
• Both synchronization beams interrupt before clearance is <210 ms
• Zero or one synchronization beams interrupt before clearance is <33 ms

Each GuardShield safety light curtain system has two synchronization beams -
one beam is at the bottom and one beam is at the top of the protective field.

Test Pulses
The safety outputs of a GuardShield safety light curtain system use test pulses
to check for OSSD output faults. This process is shown in Figure 70.
Figure 70 - OSSD Safety Output Test Pulse Characteristic

24V
OSSD 1

24V
OSSD 2

t Test (1)

t offset

(1) tTest = 100...125 ms. Actual value depends on stick length. OSSD2 has the same timing between pulses as OSSD1, with the
offset approximately half of tTest.

The pulse is as short as possible and depends on the load. 50 μs is typical for the
resistive load and longer if you use a capacitive load.
The test pulses can lead to the connected device being switched off sporadically
if the device does not filter the test pulses correctly.

92 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 6 Installation and Wiring

Typical Wiring Diagram Direct to Contactors


Figure 71 - Example of Connecting to External Contactors with a 450L-APR-ED-8 Plug-in for the
Receiver and a 450L-APT-PW-8 Plug-in for the Transmitter

Tx Rx
450L-E4FN1200YD 450L-E4FN1200YD

(1)
Connect 8 to 4 to S2
make UN a Tx
2 Brown 2 Brown
8 Red 8 Red Reset
+24V DC 4 Yellow 5 Gray OSSD1
1 White 6 Pink OSSD2 L1 L2 L3
24V Com (0V) NC (2)
5 Gray 4 Yellow EDM
NC K1
6 Pink 1 White
+ + 7 Blue (2)
Aux 7 Blue
DC ok 3 Green 3 Green K2
24- FE FE
28V
M
1606-XLP95E
N L 450L-APU-UN-8 450L-APR-ED-8
898D-F8NB-5 898D-F8NB-5 Aux

120-240V AC
N
L

Primary Protective Earth Ground


PE
(1) Manual restart
(2) Safety contactors (100S-C contactors with electronic coils). For non-motor loads, K1/K2 can be 700S-CF control relays
with electronic coils.

IMPORTANT EDM must activate in the GuardShield safety light curtain and the
application requires safety contactors (K1 and K2). EDM feedback is only
available on 8-pin plug-ins.
You must use some type of surge suppression to help protect and extend the
operating life of the OSSD output. The potentially high current surges that are
created when switching inductive load devices, such as motor starters and
solenoids, require this extra protection. Add a suppression device directly
across the coil of an inductive device to help prolong the life of the outputs.
This addition also reduces the effects of voltage transients and electrical noise
from radiating into adjacent systems.

Figure 71 shows an output with a suppression device. We recommend that you


locate the suppression device as close as possible to the load device. Since the
outputs are 24V DC, we recommend 1N4001 (50V reverse voltage) to 1N4007
(1000V reverse voltage) diodes for surge suppression for the OSSD safety
outputs. The diode connects as close as possible to the load coil. 100S
contactors and 700S control relays with electronic coils have built-in
suppression; additional components for suppression are not needed.

ATTENTION: The response time of the safety contactors often increases


drastically when you use surge suppression diodes.
Never install suppressors directly across:
• The OSSD outputs
• Contacts of the safety device or module
A short circuit fail of a surge suppressor element leads to an unsafe condition
and causes serious injury or death.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 93


Chapter 6 Installation and Wiring

Guardmaster SI Safety Relay


Figure 72 is an example of a connection to a 450L-B safety light curtain with a
5-pin transmitter plug-in (catalog number 450L-APT-PW-5) and 5-pin receiver
plug-in (catalog number 450L-APR-ON-5) to an SI safety relay (catalog number
440R-S12R2).
Figure 72 - Example Connection to 450L-B Safety Light Curtain System

Tx Rx
450L-E4FL1200YD 450L-E4FL1200YD

1 Brown
+24V DC 1 Brown RESET
2 White (Not Used)
4 Black OSSD1
24V Com (0V) 4 Black (Not Used)
2 White OSSD2
3 Blue
3 Blue
+ + 5 Gray
5 Gray
DC ok FE S11 S12 S21 S22 S34 A1
FE
24- SI RESET 0
28V 440R-S12R2
AM
1606-XLP95E MM
N L
450L-APT-PW-5 450L-APR-ON-5
889D-F5NC-5 889D-F5NC-5
13 14 23 24 Y32 L11 A2

120-240V AC
N
L

PE Primary Protective Earth Ground

Figure 73 shows a connection example of a 450L-B safety light curtain with two
universal plug-ins (catalog number 450L-APU-UN-8) to an SI safety relay
(catalog number 440R-S12R2).
Figure 73 - Connection Example

Tx Rx
450L-E4FN1200YD 450L-E4FN1200YD
S2

Connect 8 to 4 to
make UN a Tx
2 Brown 2 Brown RESET
8 Red 8 Red Reset
+24V DC 4 Yellow 4 Yellow EDM
1 White 6 Pink OSSD2
24V Com (0V) NC
5 Gray 5 Gray OSSD1
NC
6 Pink 1 White
+ + 7 Blue 7 Blue S11 S12 S21 S22 S34 A1
Aux
DC ok 3 Green SI RESET 0
24- FE 3 Green FE 440R-S12R2
28V AM
MM
1606-XLP95E
450L-APT-PW-8 450L-APR-UN-8
N L 13 14 23 24 Y32 L11 A2
889D-F8NB-5 889D-F8NB-5
Aux
120…240V AC
N
L

Primary Protective Earth Ground


PE

94 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 6 Installation and Wiring

Figure 74 is an example of a muting application that connects the 450L-E safety


light curtain with a 5-pin transmitter plug-in (catalog number
450L-APT-PW-5) and an 8-pin receiver plug-in (catalog number
450L-APR-MU-8) to an SI safety relay (catalog number 440R-S12R12).

T-connector
If a safety light curtain system has an Rx and a Tx plug-in with M12 5-pin
connectors, then you can also use a T-connector (catalog number 1485P-RDR5)
to design and connect the system (see Figure 74).
Figure 74 - Wiring with T-connector

1 2 3 4 5

For the description of the pins, see Table 47 on page 88.

ATTENTION: Confirm that the connected power supply is able to source both
connected sticks simultaneously (for power consumption, see Table 73 on
page 165).
The 450L safety light curtain transceiver stick working as a transmitter must
have firmware 2.001 or higher.

You can also use the T-connector to attach a 450L safety light curtain system to
GuardLink technology (see https://www.rockwellautomation.com/en-us/
products/hardware/allen-bradley/safety-products/guardlink-
technology.html).

GuardLink Tap Connections


Figure 75 on page 96 shows an example for the connection of a 450L-B safety
light curtain with 5-pin transmitter and 5-pin receiver plug-ins to a catalog
number 440S-SF5D GuardLink tap. A catalog number 1485P-RDR5 splitter (see
T-connector) allows both the receiver and transmitter to connect to one tap.
The firmware for the 450L safety light curtain transceiver stick working as a
transmitter must be 2.001 or larger. The firmware level is on the product label
(see Product Labels on page 112).

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 95


Chapter 6 Installation and Wiring

Figure 75 - Example Schematic Connecting to 450L-B Safety Light Curtain to GuardLink Tap
Transmitter Receiver

440S-SF5D
450L-B4FN1200YD 450L-B4FN1200YD GuardLink Tap
Firmware: 2.001 Firmware: All
INPUT

1485P-RDR5
5-pin Splitter
450L-APT-PW-5 450L-APR-ON-5

889D-F5NCDE-10 889D-F5NCDE-10

1732 ArmorBlock Connections


Figure 76 is an example of connecting to a 450L-B safety light curtain with
5-pin transmitter and receiver plug-ins to a catalog number 1732ES-IB12XOB4
ArmorBlock module. A catalog number 1485P-RDR5 splitter (see T-connector
on page 95) allows both the receiver and transmitter to connect to one input
connector. The firmware for the 450L safety light curtain transceiver stick
working as a transmitter must be 2.001 or larger. The firmware level is on the
product label; see example of Product Labels on page 112.
Figure 76 - Example Schematic Connecting to 450L-B Safety Light Curtain System
Transmitter Receiver 1732ES-IB12XOB4
Ethernet
2 1 2 1
5 5
3 4 3 4

X100 X10 X1

450L-B4FN1200YD 450L-B4FN1200YD 1485P-RDR5 1 T1 1 T1


firmware: 2.001 firmware: All 5-pin Splitter 2 I1 2 I1
3C A E 3C
4 I0 4 I0
5 T0 5 T0
1 T1 1 T1
450L-APT-PW-5 450L-APR-ON-5 2 I1 2 I1
3C B F 3C
4 I0 4 I0
5 T0 5 T0
889D-F5NCDE-10 889D-F5NCDE-10
1 T1 1+24
889D-E5NC-10 2 I1 2 O1 889D-E5NC-10 100S or 700S or 700-HPS
3C C G 3C Contactors and Relays
4 I0 4 O0 White (2) A1 A2 Blue (3)
5 T0 5C K1
Brown (1) White (2)
K1 1 T1 1+24
2 I1 2 O1
K2 Black (4) A1 A2 Gray (5)
3C D H 3C K2
Black (4) Gray (5) 4 I0 4 O0
5 T0 5C
Power
24V Com 4 1 1 4
3 2 2 3

+24V DC

Table 51 on page 97 shows the DIP switch settings for the receiver plug-in
module. You can set switches 2 and 3 to on, if needed by the application. The
transmitter plug-in does not have DIP switches.

96 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 6 Installation and Wiring

Table 51 - DIP Switch Settings


Switch 450L-APR-ON-5 Description Comment
1 Off Software configuration disabled Optional
2 Off Low range disabled Optional
3 Off Beam coding disabled Optional
4 Off Interference rejection disabled Optional

Figure 77 shows the screen captures of the ArmorBlock module properties


setup for the example schematic.
Tab Description
General Configure the module definition.
Points 0 and 1 monitor the safety light curtain OSSD outputs. Points 4 and 5 use pulse
Input configuration testing to monitor the status of the output contactors K1 and K2. The Point Operation Types
are set to Single to allow the logic function block to detect faults.
Point 0 must be set to Not Used as pin 5 on the connector is connected to the safety light
curtain housing. Point 1 is set to Standard to allow the program to cycle the power to the
Test output safety light curtains if the safety light curtain has to be power cycled. Points 4 and 5 are
the test pulses to monitor the contactors K1 and L2.
Output configuration Points 0 and 1 turn the output contactors, K1 and K2, on and off.

Figure 77 - ArmorBlock Module Properties Setup

Figure 78 on page 98 shows a typical example of a ladder logic program that


you can use with the example schematic. The comments that are embedded in
the program explain the usage of each rung.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 97


Chapter 6 Installation and Wiring

Figure 78 - ArmorBlock Ladder Logic Program

Two-sensor Muting with Muting Plug-in


Figure 79 on page 99 is a two-sensor muting example with the 450L-E safety
light curtain. The transmitter uses the 5-pin transmitter plug-in, and the
receiver uses the 8-pin muting plug-in.

98 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 6 Installation and Wiring

Figure 79 - Example Schematic for Two-sensor Muting of 450L-E Safety Light Curtain

Muting Sensor 1 Muting Sensor 2


42EF-P2MPB-F4 42EF-P2MPB-F4
Tx Rx
450L-E4FN1200YD 450L-E4FN1200YD
Mute
Dependent
Override

889D- 889D-
F4AC-5 F4AC-5
2 Brown Brown Brown
1 Brown 8 Red Black Black
+24V DC 1 White Blue Blue
2 White (Not Used) White (Not Used) White (Not Used) RESET
4 Yellow
24V Com (0V) 4 Black (Not Used)
5 Gray OSSD1
3 Blue
6 Pink OSSD2
+ + 5 Gray
FE 7 Blue
DC ok S11 S12 S21 S22 S34 A1
3 Green
24- FE SI RESET 0
28V 440R-S12R2
AM
1606-XLP95E MM
N L 450L-APT-PW-5 450L-APR-MU-8
898D-F5NC-5 898D-F8NB-5
13 14 23 24 Y32 L11 A2

120…240V AC
N
L
Primary Protective Earth Ground
PE

Table 52 shows the DIP switch settings for the receiver muting plug-in. You
can change switches 2, 3, 5, and 6 to on, if needed by the application. Switch 7
must be off and switch 8 must be on. Switches 9, 10, and 11 determine the type
of muting. The transmitter plug-in does not have DIP switches.
Table 52 - Receiver DIP Switch Settings
Switch 450L-APR-MU-8 Description Comment
1 Off — —
2 Off Low range disabled Optional
3 Off Beam coding disabled Optional
4 Off — —
5 Off Optional
Automatic start
6 Off Optional
7 Off EDM disabled —
8 On Muting Required
9 Off or on
DIP 9: Off, DIP 10: On, DIP 11: Off 2L muting Determines muting
10 Off or on DIP 9: On, DIP 10: Off, DIP 11: Off 2T muting type
11 Off
12 Off — —

Four-sensor Muting with Muting Plug-in


Figure 80 on page 100 is a four-sensor muting example with the 450L-E safety
light curtain. The transmitter uses the 5-pin transmitter plug-in. The receiver
uses the 8-pin muting plug-in at the bottom and the 8-pin I/O plug-in at the
top.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 99


Chapter 6 Installation and Wiring

Figure 80 - Example Schematic for Four-sensor Muting of 450L-E Safety Light Curtain

Muting Sensor 3 Muting Sensor 4


42EF-P2MPB-F4 42EF-P2MPB-F4

889D-F4AC-5 889D-F4AC-5

2 Brown Brown Brown


Black Black
8 Red Reset Blue Blue
1 White MS3 White (Not Used) White (Not Used)
4 Yellow MS4
450L-APC-IO-8
898D-F8NB-5 5 Gray MS1
6 Pink MS2
7 Blue
3 Green Muting Sensor 2 Muting Sensor 1
42EF-P2MPB-F4 42EF-P2MPB-F4
Tx Rx
450L-E4FN1200YD 450L-E4FN1200YD 889D-F4AC-5 889D-F4AC-5
2 Brown Brown Brown
8 Red Black Black
Brown Blue Blue
1 White Aux. Mute RESET
White (Not Used) White (Not Used)
Dependent White (Not Used)
+24V DC 4 Yellow EDM
Override
Black (Not Used) 5 Gray OSSD1
24V Com (0V) Blue
6 Pink OSSD2
Gray
FE 7 Blue
+ + 3 Green
DC ok FE S11 S12 S21 S22 S34 A1
Mute SI RESET 0
24-
28V Active 440R-S12R2
450L-APT-PW-5 450L-APR-MU-8 AM
1606-XLP95E 898D-F5NC-5 898D-F8NB-5 MM
N L
13 14 23 24 Y32 L11 A2

120…240V AC
N
L
Primary Protective Earth Ground
PE

Table 53 shows the DIP switch settings for the receiver muting plug-in. You can
change switches 2, 3, 5, and 6 to on, if needed by the application. Switch 7 must
be off and switch 8 must be on. Switches 9, 10, and 11 must be set to on for four-
sensor muting. The transmitter and I/O plug-in do not have DIP switches.
Table 53 - Receiver Muting Plug-in DIP Switch Settings
Switch 450L-APR-MU-8 Description Comment
1 Off — —
2 Off Low range disabled Optional
3 Off Beam coding disabled Optional
4 Off — —
5 Off Optional
Automatic start
6 Off Optional
7 Off EDM disabled —
8 On Muting Required
9 Off or on DIP 9: Off, DIP 10: On, DIP 11: Off 2L muting
10 Off or on DIP 9: On, DIP 10: Off, DIP 11: Off 2T muting Determines muting type
11 Off or on DIP9: On, DIP 10: On DIP: 11 On 4T muting.
12 Off — —

100 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 7

Status Indicators and Troubleshooting

Status Indicators The safety light curtain conducts an internal self-test after startup. If an error
occurs, an appropriate signal combination displays the indicator status. If a
GuardShield™ safety light curtain acts like a transmitter or as a receiver, it is
also shown on the plug-in label.

Transmitter

Receiver

IMPORTANT If you use a universal plug-in, only the status indicators or the wiring
can inform you if a safety light curtain is a transmitter or a receiver.

A quick categorization of an error can be done by checking the status indicator


STS (see Table 55 on page 103 and Table 56 on page 104).

System Status Indicators


There are different status indicators in the area closest to the connection
plug-in. The number of indicators depends on the stick type:
• 450L-B: Seven indicators
• 450L-E and 450L PAC: Ten indicators

The STS and OUT status indicators are bicolor. Functions and colors are
defined in Table 54 on page 102.
Figure 81 - Status Indicators of a 450L Safety Light Curtain

450L-B

450L-E
450L PAC

The transceiver architecture of the 450L safety light curtain results in the Rx
and Tx having the same status indicators.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 101


Chapter 7 Status Indicators and Troubleshooting

Status Indicator for Normal Operation


Table 54 lists normal operation status indicators on a 450L safety light curtain
(colors and functions) for normal operation.
Table 54 - Status Indicators
System
No. Marking Status Indicator Name Color Behavior Description Status
Green On Power on and system is OK No
Configuration change or the receiver operated previously with
Green Red Flashing No
another transmitter
Green Off Flashing (98:2) Interference rejection is enabled No
1 STS Status indicator Optical interference is detected (this status is indicated, even if
Green Red Flashing (90:10) No
interference rejection is already enabled)
Green Off Flashing No
Off Red Flashing See Troubleshoot on page 103 No
Red On No
On Plug-in identifies stick as a transmitter No
Flashing 1 Hz (50:50) See Troubleshoot on page 103 No
2 Transmitter Green
Flashing 1 Hz (98:2) Reduced range and/or beam coding is activated No
Off Stick is receiver No
On Plug-in identifies stick as a receiver No
Green
3 Receiver Flashing 1 Hz (98:2) Reduced range and/or beam coding is activated No
Off Stick is transmitter No
Green On Safety outputs are on (receiver) No
4 OUT Safety outputs Red On Safety outputs are off (receiver) No
— Off Transmitter No
On Bottom half zone is not interrupted and intensity is OK Yes
Green
5 Regional light intensity level 1 Flashing 1 Hz (50:50) Bottom half zone intensity is at the limit Yes
— Off Bottom half zone interrupted Yes
On Top half zone is not interrupted and intensity is OK Yes
Green
6 Regional light intensity level 2 Flashing 1 Hz (50:50) Top half zone intensity is at the limit Yes
— Off Top half zone interrupted Yes
Amber On Start required (receiver) No
7 RES Start
— Off No start is required (receiver) No
Off Safety light curtain that is not muted No
Orange
8 MUT Muting On Safety light curtain that is muted No
Orange Off Flashing Muting error No
Orange Off No blanking feature selected No
9 BLK Blanking Orange On Blanking feature that is selected No
Orange Off Flashing Blanking error No
No cascading plug-in that is inserted or Tx OSSDs of the
Off No
Red connected cascade are in on-state (Rx only)
10 CAS Cascading On OSSDs of connected cascade are in off-state (Rx only) No
Red Off Flashing Error cascading plug-in No

The last column in Table 54 describes whether the signal displays


simultaneously at both sticks:
• No - the status indicator shows only the status of the individual stick.
• Yes -the status indicator shows the status of the complete system.

102 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 7 Status Indicators and Troubleshooting

Optical Push Button


The optical push button is on the front window next to the status indicators. To
activate, place your finger on the square (see Figure 82). The optical push
button operates with infrared light and can be used to:
• Confirm a new configuration (see Confirmation of a New System
Configuration on page 59).
• Switch on/off the integrated laser alignments system (450L-E safety light
curtain only) (Principle of Operation on page 21).
• Start power off/on cycle if there is a lockout. For recycling, press the
optical push button between 10…20 seconds. Otherwise, the recycle
command is ignored (see Table 56 on page 104).
• Communicate with the Optical Interface Device (see Optical Interface
Device (OID) on page 106).
Figure 82 - Optical Push Button

Troubleshoot Status Indicator Error Display


If the STS status indicator is steady red, flashes red, or flashes green, an error
occurred which stops the system from working in normal operation.
Figure 83 - Status Indicators

Error types are differentiated according to Table 55.


Table 55 - Error Types
Number STS Code Error Type
1 Steady red Internal error
2 Flashes red External error
3 Flashes green Invalid DIP switch settings
4 Flashes green/red Configuration changed

Errors can be caused externally (STS = flashing red) and internally


(STS = steady red). Examples of external recoverable errors include ambient
light and/or Start button fault.

If there is an error, the second status indicator provides more information


about the root cause (Table 56 on page 104).

ATTENTION: To indicate if a system is in the Configuration mode, the STS


status indicator flashes alternately red/green (50:50; 1 Hz). The Configuration
mode is not an error, but indicates that the DIP switch configuration and/ or
plug-in changed and must be confirmed. For normal operation, first confirm
the configuration. This procedure is described in Confirmation of a New
System Configuration on page 59.

The timing of the status indicator flashes defines a frequency and a duty cycle.
The frequency defines one sequence of on and off, as a default frequency is
1 Hz, if not otherwise mentioned. The duty cycle defines the ratio of the on
duration and the off duration of the status indicator. If not otherwise
mentioned, the default value for the duty cycle is 50:50, meaning 50% on, 50%
off.
Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 103
Chapter 7 Status Indicators and Troubleshooting

Table 56 - Status Indicators for External Errors and System Errors


Error First Status Indicator Second Status Indicator
No. Marking Flash Duty Cycle Flash
Short Description (Name) Color Frequency (On/Off) Marking (Name) Color Frequency Duty Cycle (1)
0 Configuration changed (2) STS Red/ Green 1 Hz 50:50 — — — —
1 Internal lockout (3) STS Red On 100:0 — — — —
2 (1) STS Red 1 Hz 50:50 RES Amber 1 Hz 10:90
EDM error
3 Start error (3) STS Red 1 Hz 50:50 RES Amber 1 Hz 90:10
Ambient light or EMC
4 STS Red 1 Hz 50:50 — — — —
disturbances
Short circuit between OSSDs
5 STS Red 1 Hz 50:50 OUT Red 1 Hz 50:50
to 24V DC (lockout) (1)
Stick type (transmitter
6 Error supply voltage (3) STS Red 1 Hz 50:50 or receiver) Green 1 Hz 50:50
24V DC connected to
7 STS (Tx) Green On 100:0 Stick type transmitter Green 1 Hz 50:50
transmitter plug-in input (3)
Mixed design of 450L-B and
450L-E sticks or stick Regional light intensity
8 STS (Tx) Red 1 Hz 50:50 Green 1 Hz 50:50
identification mismatch when level 1 and level 2
beam coding is used
9 Invalid DIP switch setting STS Green 1 Hz 50:50 Stick type receiver Green 1 Hz 50:50
Muting timing error
10 STS (Rx) Red 1 Hz 50:50 MUT Amber 1 Hz 90:10
(450L-E only)
Muting sequence error
11 STS (Rx) Red 1 Hz 50:50 MUT Amber 1 Hz 10:90
(450L-E only)
12 Blank error (450L-E only) STS Red 1 Hz 50:50 BLK Amber 1 Hz 50:50
13 Cascade error (450L-E only) STS Red 1 Hz 50:50 CAS Red 1 Hz 50:50
Failure in a safety component Regional light intensity
14 or logic that is connected to a STS Red 1 Hz 50:50 Green 1 Hz 50:50
level 2
top I/O-plug-in
Failure in a safety component Regional light intensity
15 or logic that is connected to a STS Red 1 Hz 50:50 Green 1 Hz 50:50
level 1
bottom plug-in
(1) The interpretation is first value on time, second value off time, for example, 10:90 means 10% on, 90% off.
(2) Error: If there is an error, remove the error source. For manual restart, activate the Restart button.
(3) If there is a lockout, remove the lockout source. Lockout requires power recycling or adequate action (see Table 57 on page 105), Manual Start/Restart on page 26, and Optical Push Button
on page 103.

ATTENTION: If you use automatic restart, the system starts immediately.

For fault conditions 0…13 and corrective actions, see Table 57 on page 105.

104 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 7 Status Indicators and Troubleshooting

Table 57 - Errors, Lockouts, and Corrections


Condition Error Description Action
0 Confirmation changed See Confirmation of a New System Configuration on page 59.
Make sure that the correct plug-in is inserted and that the DIP switch settings of the plug-in are in the
correct position.
One of the following methods clears the Lockout mode of a transmitter stick:
1. Power down, then power up. If the fault is still present, the module lockout occurs again.
2. A reset signal longer than 10 seconds and less than 20 seconds acts like a power-up.
1 Internal lockout 3. Press your finger on the optical push button longer than 10 seconds and less than 20 seconds (Optical Push
Button on page 103)
If the fault persists, replace the 450L-B safety light curtain transceiver stick.
Further diagnosis options are possible with the Connected Components Workbench™ software in
combination with the USB/ optical interface device (OID; Cat No. 450L-AD-OID). If the 450L-B safety light
curtain unit has a lockout, the exact fault description can be determined with these tools.
Short circuit between or to ground or over current at OSSDs
1. Check wiring and function of external contactor
EDM feedback signal at receiver plug-in not
2 2. Check connected relay for closed contact (if OSSD on-input Relay monitoring must have GND level, if OSSD
okay (external error)
off-input Relay monitoring must have +24V)
3. Repower the system or use adequate action after the lockout source is removed.
3 Start signal not okay Check signal status and signal timing at receiver plug-in for the manual start
Check system set-up and remove foreign ambient light source. Ambient light sources can be:
• Strong flashing beacon
Ambient light can lead to short sporadic • Infrared remote controls
4 switch off the OSSD.
• Laser pointers
• Infrared light sensors
Short circuit between or to ground or over Check wiring and connected components at the two OSSDs
5 current at OSSDs
6 Error supply voltage Check the 24V DC power supply to the stick
Make sure DIP switch 4 is set to the default position (off). Make sure that the 24V DC voltage is not supplied to
Voltage that is connected to transmitter plug- pin 4 of
7 the Cat. No. 450L-APT-PW-5 part or voltage supply to pin 1 of the Cat. No. 450L-APT-PW-8 plug-in
in input connector.
Stick identification mismatch when beam
8 Check design according to chapter: Beam coding on page 30
coding is used
9 Invalid DIP switch setting Confirm the DIP switch settings of the inserted plug-in, see Receiver Plug-in DIP Switch Settings on page 54
10 Muting timing error (450L-E only) Make sure that of the muting times are not above maximum or below minimum limits (see Muting on page 34)
11 Muting sequence error (450L-E only) Make sure that the connected muting sensors are interrupted in the right sequence (see Muting on page 34)
Make sure that beams of fixed blanked objects are always interrupted (see Teach-in Fixed Blanking on
12 Blanking error (450L-E only) page 29)
Make sure that the OSSDs of the connected safety component do not exhibit an error (see Cascading on
13 Cascading error (450L-E only) page 43).
Make sure that both edges are parallel and installed at the same level.
Make sure that the transparent front cover is clean, no dust and is not scratched.
Make sure that the distance between transmitter and receiver is above the minimum distance.
14 System cannot be aligned Make sure that the distance between transmitter and receiver is below the maximum distance.
Make sure that low operation range is not activated if operated above the maximum range of the low
operation range function
Check all hints of condition 14 first
Check that no ambient light from other sensors, the sun, or adjacent safety light curtain systems can impact
the performance of a GuardShield safety light curtain system.
15 OSSD outputs switch off sporadically Make sure that the power supply is adequate and the devices that are connected to the OSSD outputs are
within the limits.
Make sure that the GuardShield safety light curtain connection cables are not parallel to high-power supply
cables of the application

IMPORTANT Conditions 0…13 of Table 56 on page 104 show the status indicator for
condition numbers 0…13 in Table 57.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 105


Chapter 7 Status Indicators and Troubleshooting

Optical Interface Device (OID)


More service information is available by using the optical interface device
(catalog number 450L-AD-OID) and the Rockwell Automation Connected
Components Workbench package. This device can snap onto a stick; you can
use the device, for example, to visualize the protective field status if connected
to a computer via a USB interface. The required Connected Components
Workbench software is available from rok.auto/ccw.

The initial release of the 450L PAC safety light curtain does not support the
Connected Components Workbench software.
Figure 84 - Optical Interface Device Snapped on a GuardShield Safety Light Curtain
USB Plug (Type
Mini-B) Mechanical Stop for
Correct Positioning

Optical Interface
Device (OID)

The Optical Interface Device (OID) has a USB interface for connection to a
personal computer for diagnostic purposes. Use a standard USB A plug to USB
Mini-B plug cable for connecting to the OID. The OID includes a USB (Type A
<–> Type Mini-B) 1 m (3.28 ft) long connection cable (catalog number 2711C-
CBL-UU02). Position the device correctly at the end of the protective field (2)
above the status indicators to allow communication. First move the latch of the
interface so that the latch touches the bottom of the end cap and rotate to snap
the latch in.

You can use the OID when the safety light curtain mounts with the top/bottom
and/or the side mounting kit. If there is a weld shield, remove the weld shield
before you install the OID.

IMPORTANT We continuously improve and expand the functionality of the


GuardShield safety light curtain product line. Therefore, new firmware
releases can be available. For diagnostic purposes, confirm that both
sticks (Rx and Tx) and the OID operate with the latest available firmware
revision.

106 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 7 Status Indicators and Troubleshooting

Troubleshoot with Software


When the Connected Component Workbench connects to the GuardShield
safety light curtain through the USB port with the Optical Interface Device, the
diagnosis function displays the status of the connected stick. If there is an
error, detailed diagnostic information of the corresponding stick is provided.

IMPORTANT We continuously improve and expand the functionality of Connected


Components Workbench software. Therefore, new software releases
can be available. For diagnostic purposes, confirm that the Connected
Components Workbench software and the OID operate with the latest
firmware revision. Update the Connected Components Workbench
software to the latest version.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 107


Chapter 7 Status Indicators and Troubleshooting

Notes:

108 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 8

Safety Instructions

LASER LIGHT CLASS 2 HAZARD: Do not stare into the beam.


The 450L-E and 450L PAC GuardShield™ safety light curtains are equipped
with an integrated laser alignment aid (see Laser Alignment on page 23).

Maintenance
ATTENTION: Never operate the 450L safety light curtain before you conduct
the Regular Inspection. Improper inspection can lead to serious, or even
deadly, injury.
Disconnect all power to the machine and safety system during electrical
installation.
Before you power up the 450L safety light curtain system, review the
checklist:
• For safety reasons, record all inspection results.
• Only perform the inspection if you clearly understand the function of the 450L
safety light curtain and the machine.
The installer, engineer, and operator must all have sufficient information
available for the inspection.

Regular Inspection Perform the following inspection actions regularly, daily or according to the
risk assessment.
1. You must pass through the GuardShield safety light curtain protective
field to approach the hazardous machine parts.
2. You cannot step through the sensing area while working on dangerous
machine parts.
3. The safety distance of the application is bigger than the calculated value.
4. The optic front cover is not scratched or dirty.

The inspection interval for step 1…step 4 are:


• Daily or whenever the machine setting changes (electrical or
mechanical).
• Whenever you replace a safety light curtain component (stick and/or
plug-in).
• According to the requirements of local regulation or an application-
specific standard.
• According to the inspection instruction and the risk assessment of the
application.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 109


Chapter 8 Safety Instructions

Operate the machine and check if the hazardous movement stops under the
following circumstances:
• You interrupt the protective field.
• If you place the test rod directly in front of the transmitter or receiver, or
between the transmitter and receiver, and the protective field interrupts,
the hazardous machine movement stops immediately (see Figure 85).
• There is no hazardous machine movement while the test rod is anywhere
within the protective field.
• Confirm that there are no reflective surfaces within the calculated
distance (see Minimum Distance from Reflective Surfaces on page 66).

Before you introduce the test rod, verify that the protective field is free. Both
intensity status indicators are green at the stick that acts as the receiver (see
Figure 42 on page 68). If the two intensity status indicators are not green,
adjust the sticks until the intensity status indicators are green. Move the test
rod through the protective field as indicated in Figure 85. Use test rod catalog
number 450L-AT-14 for the safety light curtain with finger resolution [14 mm
(0.56 in.)] and test rod catalog number 450L-AT-30 for the safety light curtain
with hand resolution [30 mm (1.19 in.)]. The catalog number of the test rod is
printed on a label on each rod. The protective field must always interrupt:
• If you place the test rod at any angle anywhere within the protective field
(static).
• If you move the test rod (according to Figure 85) with the axis of the test
rod normal to the plane of the detection zone, at any speed from 0…0.3
m/s (dynamic).

The interruption of the protective field displays at the status indicators. Verify
that the minimum of one intensity status indicator (see Figure 42 on page 68)
is off as long as the test rod is in the protective field. If both intensity status
indicators are simultaneously green or flashing green during the static and
dynamic testing, the resolution to operate the application is not fulfilled.

ATTENTION: If any of the previous conditions do not stop the hazardous


motion of the machine or simultaneously lead to two green intensity status
indicators (see Figure 42 on page 68), then do not place the machine into
operation.
Figure 85 - Proper Testing of Protective Field Using Test Rod

IMPORTANT If one you use or more mirrors (see Mirrors on page 67), inspect each
protective field separately. Perform the movement of the test rod is
directly in front of the mirrors.

110 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 8 Safety Instructions

Additionally, conduct a more detailed inspection:


• Whenever a machine setting changes.
• The local regulation or an application-specific standard requires an
inspection.
• According to the inspection instruction and the risk assessment of the
application.
• Frequently (for example, every 6 months).

A more detailed inspection must consider these actions:


• The machine stops or does not obstruct any safety function.
• The latest machine or connection modifications have no effect on the
control system.
• The outputs of the GuardShield safety light curtain properly connect to
the machine.
• The total response time of the machine is shorter than the calculated
value.
• Cables and plugs of the GuardShield safety light curtain are in flawless
condition.
• Mounting brackets, caps, and cables are tightly secured.
• Optical windows and components (mirrors or weld shields) are clean.

IMPORTANT Document the test results, sign, and file them appropriately.

Verify 450L PAC


The 450L PAC is a Perimeter Access Control safety light curtain that is
designed for whole body detection to create a safety perimeter around a
machine or hazardous location. To verify correct operation, first place the
machine or hazardous location in a safe state. Then interrupt the beams, refer
to Figure 2 on page 12 for the beam positions of different models. Confirm that
the OSSD safety output switches to the off-state (refer to Figure 134 on
page 170 for the indicator status) and remains off for as long as the beams are
interrupted.

Clean Optic Front Window


The effectiveness and the reliability of the safety light curtain system is
reduced if the optic front window of the GuardShield safety light curtain is
dirty. Regularly clean the window with a soft cloth and rub without pressure.
Do not apply aggressive or abrasive agents, which can attack the surface.

LASER LIGHT CLASS 2 HAZARD: Do not stare into the beam.


The 450L-E and 450L PAC GuardShield safety light curtains are equipped with
an integrated laser alignment aid (see Laser Alignment on page 23).

Disposal
The GuardShield safety light curtain is designed according to the main
environmental protection directives (for example, RoHS). Always dispose of
unserviceable devices in compliance with local/national rules and regulations.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 111


Chapter 8 Safety Instructions

Product Labels The address that is printed on the stick and on the plug-in products and
packaging labels refers to the Rockwell Automation global address. For the
regional office addresses, see the listing on the back cover of this publication.

Stick Labels
The following labels are for illustration only and are subject to change.
Figure 86 - Explanation of Date Code on a Stick (Printed Before November 2018)

In Figure 86, 1335 = year 2013, week: 35; the serial number for 450L-B is
1068700055 and 450L-E is 1068800055.
Figure 87 - 450L POC Transceiver Stick Label (Printed Since November 2018)
GuardShield TM Prot. Height/Res: 150/30mm
Operating Range: 0.9 ... 7m
Safety Catergory:
Type4, Cat4, PL e/ SILcl3
Cat. No. 450L-B4HN0150YD Enclosure Rating: IP65 Power: Class 2, 24VDC ±15%
Ser A FW Ambient Temp: -10°…+55°C
PN-250474 Resp Time: < 13ms + Ta SN 00887172376788
PRODUCT OF GERMANY (See User Manual: 450L-UM001) ESPE
Rockwell Automation, 1201 S 2nd St, Milwaukee, WI 53204, USA 4040 2018/11/06 24XE

GuardShield TM Prot. Height/Res: 150/14mm


Operating Range: 0.5 ... 9m
Safety Catergory:
Type4, Cat4, PL e/ SILcl3
Cat. No. 450L-E4FL0150YD Enclosure Rating: IP65 Power: Class 2, 24VDC ±15%
Ser A FW Ambient Temp: -10°…+55°C
PN-412764 Resp Time: 9 ... 30ms + Ta SN 00889508563404
PRODUCT OF GERMANY (See User Manual: 450L-UM001) ESPE
Rockwell Automation, 1201 S 2nd St, Milwaukee, WI 53204, USA 4040 2018/11/06 24XE

Figure 88 - 450L PAC Transceiver Stick Label (Printed Since September 2021)

In Figure 87 and Figure 88, the production date code format is yyyy/mm/dd.
Figure 89 - 450L-E and 450L PAC Laser Warning Label

Figure 89 is on the backside of the aluminum profile.

112 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 8 Safety Instructions

Plug-in Label
Figure 90 - Explanation of Date Code at a 450L Plug-in

In Figure 90, 1337 = year 2013, week 37; the serial number is 123456.

A black square with a gray letter indicates the principle type of plug-in (see
Figure 90), where:
• C = Cascading
• R = Receiver
• T = Transmitter
• U = Universal

IMPORTANT The catalog number is also printed on the plug-in housing, which is
inside the transceiver stick.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 113


Chapter 8 Safety Instructions

Notes:

114 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 9

Connected Components Workbench Software

Overview Use the Connected Components Workbench™ software to monitor the 450L
POC safety light curtains and to configure the 450L-E safety light curtain. The
450L POC safety light curtain has two versions:
• 450L-B - basic on/off
• 450L-E - enhanced features

The Connected Components Workbench software can monitor and configure


only the 450L-B version of the safety light curtain; the 450L-B safety light
curtain does not have configurable parameters. Use the Connected
Components Workbench software to do the following:
• Setup
- Muting
- Floating blanking
- Reduced resolution
- Fixed blanking
- A combination of floating, reduced resolution, and fixed blanking
• Diagnostics
- Know which beams are blanked or blocked
- Review last 10 lockout codes
• Export the configuration to a file

The Connected Components Workbench software performs its function with


the 450L-OID Optical Interface Device (OID). For more information on the
OID, Optical Interface Device (OID) on page 106.

The initial release of the 450L PAC safety light curtain does not support the
Connected Components Workbench software.

Multiple Subconfigurations This manual assumes that you have loaded the Connected Components
Workbench software, version 12 or later.

Start a New Project


The following example uses the Connected Components Workbench software
(version 12) loaded onto a Windows® 10 environment.
1. See Figure 91 on page 116. Select the Start icon.
2. Scroll down to Rockwell Automation. Expand the list and select
Connected Components Workbench.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 115


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

Figure 91 - Start Menu

Figure 92 shows the Start page. On this page, you can:


• Create a project
• Open an existing project
• Open a recent project
• Open online training videos (requires an internet connection)
You can clear the Show page on the startup checkbox to bypass this page.
3. Start a new project three ways:
• Select New… under the Project heading.
• Select File in the main menu, then select New.
• Press Ctrl-N on your keyboard.
Figure 92 - New Project

Figure 93 on page 117 shows the New Project window. The Connected
Components Workbench software maintains a list of projects to help
prevent overwriting of an existing project. The name of each new project
increments by one (for example, Project90). In this window, you can
customize the name and browse for a location for the file.
4. Type a new name, for example, My 450L Project.
5. Select Create.

116 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

Figure 93 - Project Name

Figure 94 shows the Add Device window.


6. Expand the Safety listing.
7. Expand 450L Safety Light Curtains.
8. Select 450L.
9. Select the version number that matches the stick firmware.
10. Select the Select button.
Figure 94 - Add a Device

To determine the current firmware revision of the safety light curtain, open the
RSLinx® software, right-click 450L, and select Device Properties. An example is
shown in Figure 95.
Figure 95 - Firmware Revision

The firmware selection process is confirmed in Figure 96 on page 118.


11. Verify that the selection and firmware revision are correct and select Add
to Project.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 117


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

Figure 96 - Add to Project

Figure 97 shows the 450L safety light curtain in the Project Organizer.
The project name appears in the title of the window and in the Project
Organizer. In this example, the safety light curtain project name is My
450L Project.
The 450L safety light curtain appears in the Project Organizer with the
default name 450L_1. If desired, but not required, change the name of the
safety controller. Select the name to change the name of the safety light
curtain (or right-click and select Rename). The name that you choose
must follow these rules:
• No special characters, except underscore
• No double underscore
• 1…32 characters
An asterisk appears after the controller name and project name to
indicate that a valid project is not yet saved.
12. In the Project Organizer, double-click the device name or icon to open
the product configuration tab.
Figure 97 - Project Created

118 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

Workbench Layout
Figure 98 shows the six major sections of the workbench layout:
• Project Organizer – shows all devices that the project contains.
• Header – shows the device identity and the connection information.
• Toolbar – shows the operations/commands for the 450L safety light
curtain. The set of operations for 450L-B and 450L-E devices (DIP switch
1 = off) are: Diagnose, Report, Manual, Help. The set of operations for the
450L-E device (DIP switch 1=on) is: Download, Upload, Diagnose, Report,
Manual, and Help.
• Graphic – shows a graphical representation of the safety light curtain
device and the system mode status. You can minimize the graphic pane
to expand the Configuration Pane and Diagnostic Information.
• Configuration Tree – provides the navigation to the configuration of a
safety light curtain.
• Configuration Pane – sets the configuration details of the 450L-E safety
light curtain. The content of this pane coincides with the selection in the
Configuration Tree.
Figure 98 - Project Opened – Workbench Layout

Project Organizer Figure 99 shows an example with multiple devices that are used in the project.
Select the icons in the Project Organizer add, remove, or discover devices.
Figure 99 - Add, Remove, and Discover Devices

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 119


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

General
Figure 100 shows the General setup. The device is automatically assigned the
name 450L_1 and you can customize this name. You can also enter a
50-character description. This description shows the Vendor, Stick Firmware
Revision, and OID Firmware Revision. If installed, the Cascading Plug-in
Firmware Revision also appears.
Figure 100 - General Setup

Hardware
Figure 101 shows the hardware setup. Select the appropriate values to match
the safety light curtain in use.
Figure 101 - Hardware Setup

DIP Switch
Figure 102 on page 121 shows the hardware DIP switch settings for the
connection plug-in. The graphic updates to match the actual switch settings
when you make a connection to the device.

To use the Connected Components Workbench software to configure the


450L-E safety light curtains, switch 1 must ON and all other switches are OFF.
If switch 1 is OFF, then the Connected Components Workbench software
shows the status of the safety light curtain.

120 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

Figure 102 - Hardware DIP Switch Settings

USB Status
Figure 103 shows the status of the USB connection. The status is read-only.
Figure 103 - USB Status

Subconfigurations
Figure 104 on page 122 shows the subconfiguration setup. The
subconfiguration setup is only available when the OID connects to a receiver;
the transmitter does not require a configuration.
Key elements of subconfigurations include the following:
• With DIP switch 1 set to ON, you can create up to four subconfigurations.
• You can adjust the General, Muting, and Blanking settings for each
sub-configuration.
• If you install a cascading plug-in, the Cascaded Safety Component
automatically refreshes when a configuration uploads from the safety
light curtain.
• The four configurations use the same GPIO.
• If DIP switch 1 is set back to 0, the configuration via the Connected
Components Workbench software erases.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 121


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

Figure 104 - Sub-Configuration Setup

General Settings
Figure 105 shows the default General Settings. The general settings apply to
both the muting and blanking functions, if these functions are enabled. See
Table 58 on page 123 for descriptions of each setting.
Figure 105 - General Settings

122 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

Table 58 - General Setting Descriptions


Setting Description
Can only be selected for 8-pin Rx plug-in or for 5-pin Rx plug-in with I/O cascading plug-in.
The selections are:
• Automatic start – If the safety light curtain is clear, the OSSD outputs turn on. This mode
applies to power-up and after power-up.
• Power up Start Interlock – Upon power-up, the start must be pressed and released within a
window of 50…5000 ms. After power-up, the OSSD output operates automatically.
Start mode • Manual Start – Upon power-up and after the OSSDs turn off, the start must be pressed and
released within a window of 50…5000 ms. The OSSD outputs energize on the trailing edge
of the start signal.
• Manual Start with Off Function – Upon power-up and after the OSSDs turn off, the start
must be pressed and released within a window of 50…5000 ms. The OSSD outputs
energize on the trailing edge of the start signal. The OSSD outputs can also be turned off
with the start.
Start release function can be selected with either the 8-pin Rx plug-ins or the 5-pin plug-ins
with an I/O plug-in. Start Release and EDM cannot be on simultaneously.
Start release When the safety light curtain is clear, the OSSD outputs energize on the leading edge of the
start release input.
EDM function can only be selected with 8-pin Rx plug-ins. Start Release and EDM cannot be
on simultaneously.
The EDM input must change state within the selected time. If the EDM signal does not change
state, the OSSD outputs de-energize and the safety light curtain is locked out; a lockout
EDM enable requires a power cycle to clear the fault.
• Min: 50 ms
• Max: 1275 ms
• Increment: 5 ms
• Default: 300 ms (when enabled)
Operating range Allows you to set the operating range to either long range (default) or short range.
Enables beam coding. Beam coding helps prevents interference from neighboring safety
Beam coding light curtains. The response time increases if beam coding is selected.
Enables interference rejection. Interference rejection is an enhancement to beam coding. In
applications where enabling beam coding alone does not mitigate interference, the
interference rejection feature can be enabled to alter the scan pattern to restrict stray light
from a neighboring 450L-E safety light curtain from affecting operation. The response time
Interference increases if interference rejection is selected, however, configuration in the Connected
rejection Components Workbench software, as opposed to by DIP switch, refines the settings and
maintains that the most appropriate scan pattern is used, which can be less than the
response time derived for DIP switch configuration - refer to Table 18 on page 49 and
Table 19 on page 50 for response times set by DIP switch or Connected Components
Workbench software.
External test Enables an input to either turn the OSSD outputs on or off.
enables
Defines whether the safety light curtain operates in a multiple scanning mode. When
enabled, multiple scan modes only turn off OSSDs if there are at least three consecutive
scans with an interruption. The normal mode of operation is the Double-scan, which turns
Multiple scans off OSSDs if there is an interruption in at least two consecutive scans. This extra measure of
resiliency against spurious trips adds an additional 33% (approximately) to the response
time.
You can define a filter time to ignore short interruptions of the safety light curtain.
• Min: 0 ms
• Max: 174 ms
• Increment: 2 ms
Short interruption
ignored ATTENTION: A response set time longer than 90 ms can
allow a person to walk through the safety light curtain
undetected. Adjust safety distance/physical barriers
accordingly.
You can define a filter time the OSSD outputs from changing too quickly. This function is
applicable when the OSSD outputs are connected to electromechanical devices like relays
and contactors, and the safety light curtain is set for automatic start.
If the safety light curtain is broken and cleared more than twice within the off time, the OSSD
OSSD threshold outputs turn off during the on time. The on time must be equal to or greater than the off
time time.
• Min: 30 ms
• Max: 5000 ms
• Default: On 500 ms, off 250 ms

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 123


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

Table 58 - General Setting Descriptions (Continued)


Setting Description
If enabled, the laser turns off automatically after the selected time expires.
Laser switch off • Min: 0 s
time • Max: 255 s
• Increment: 1 s
Configured The response time is automatically adjusted based on protective height, multiple scanning,
response time beam coding, and short interruption ignore functions.
Configured The resolution is automatically adjusted when reduced resolution or floating blanking are
resolution configured.

GPIO Figure 106 shows an overview of the layout of the General Purpose Input
Output (GPIO) window. The window has three significant areas:
1. Connection plug-in
2. Cascading plug-in
3. Message box — informs you whether the mandatory GPIO is specified

You cannot download the configuration to the stick until the mandatory GPIO
is complete. When complete, the message box has a green background.
Figure 106 - GPIO Overview

Figure 107 on page 125 shows an example of the GPIO selections. The
Connected Components Workbench software automatically determines the
available pins on the connection [1] and cascading [2] plug-ins. A message [3]
displays to show whether mandatory configuration points are selected. When
complete, the message background turns from red to green.

The subconfiguration setup automatically determines the available selections.


This selection is a four-sensor muting example with two subconfigurations.
The connection plug-in has three I/O and the cascading plug-in has three I/O
(inputs or outputs) and two I (inputs).

124 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

The selection for IO_1 shows seven mandatory inputs. Three of the mandatory
inputs have white boxes. You must assign at least two of the three mandatory
inputs to the connection plug-in. You can assign the third mandatory input to
the connection or cascading plug-in. The four mandatory muting sensors are
disabled as you can only assign these sensors on the cascading plug-in.

With eight potential I/O and seven mandatory inputs, you can use one of the
I/O for the optional inputs or outputs.
Figure 107 - GPIO Selection Settings

Item Description
1 Mandatory inputs
2 Mandatory muting sensors
3 Optional inputs or outputs

Table 59 on page 126 lists the possible selections and their descriptions. The
Connected Components Workbench software automatically determines the
possible selection choices, depending on the hardware. See Table 58 on
page 123 for detailed descriptions of the selections.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 125


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

Table 59 - GPIO Selections


I/O Selection Description
Activates this subconfiguration. Only one subconfiguration can be
Activate subconfiguration # active. At least one subconfiguration must be active.
Monitors external devices that the safety light curtain OSSD
External device monitoring outputs drive.
Laser alignment on/off Turns the integrated laser alignment function on and off.
Manual (re)start Input turns on the OSSD outputs if the safety light curtain is clear.
Input
Turns on the OSSD outputs if a muting error occurs and the safety
Mute dependent override light curtain is blocked.
Muting sensor # Indicates that a sensor is blocked.
With the safety light curtain clear, the start release input turns on
Start release the OSSD outputs on the leading edge of the signal.
Test input Turns the OSSD outputs on or off, depending on the configuration.
Indicates that the logic applied to the combined status of the two
Combined status parameters is satisfied.
Indicates when muting is active. The appropriate muting inputs
Muting active (signals/sensors) go low within the T(sens) time and within the
proper sequence.
Indicates when either a muting timing error or muting sequence
Muting error error is present.
Muting sequence error Indicates that the muting inputs occurred in an incorrect order.
Muting timing error Indicates the T(sens) time or the T(espe) time are exceeded.
Indicates that the safety light curtain is waiting for the start input.
Start After the OSSD outputs energize, the start output turns off.
Status EDM/start release Indicates the status of the EDM or start release input.
Status error (lockout/external Indicates that a lockout or external error has occurred.
error)
Status external error Indicates that an external error has occurred.
Output The intensity of one or more of the beams on the cascading half
Status intensity (cascading (top side) of the safety light curtain is below Good Intensity. This
end) occurrence is reported as Diagnostic Parameter 3.14.
The intensity of one or more of the beams on the connection half
Status intensity (connection (bottom side) of the safety light curtain is below Good Intensity.
end) This occurrence is reported as Diagnostic Parameter 3.124.
The intensity of one or more of the beams on the connection half
Status intensity (connection/ (bottom side) or the cascading side (top side) of the safety light
cascading end) curtain is below Good Intensity. This occurrence is reported as
Diagnostic Parameter 3.12 and 3.14.
Status lockout Indicates that a lockout status has occurred.
Status mutes dependent Indicates that the mute dependent override signal is active.
override
Status OSSD outputs Indicates the status of the OSSD outputs.
Status helps protected field Indicates that the status of the whole helps the protected height
free (both the bottom side and the top side) of the safety light curtain.
Status test input Indicates the status of the test input.

Figure 108 on page 127 shows possible settings each of the I/O types. The
Connected Components Workbench software automatically determines the
allowable selections:
• You can assign many inputs High/Low logic and have adjustable filter
times from 0…255 ms.
• Muting, Cascading OSSD and (Cascading) E-stop inputs have fixed logic
at Low Active and cannot be changed.
• Cascading OSSD input filter times range from 3…255 ms.
• E-stop input filter times range from 4…255 ms.
• The outputs only have logic options.

126 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

The Combined Status output allows and/or logic to be applied to two selectable
status outputs.
Figure 108 - GPIO Selection Settings

Diagnose Window Figure 109 shows the Diagnose window layout. The Diagnose window is only
available when the Connected Components Workbench software has a
connection with the safety light curtain. This layout has three regions:
• Toolbar
• Graphic
• Diagnostic parameters
Figure 109 - Diagnose Window Layout

Export
The Export creates a CSV file of the complete safety light curtain hardware
setup and all available diagnostic data.

Before saving to a file, one dialog window that contains the default full name
(path and file name) is shown. You can change the saving path or the saving
name. After you press Save, the parameter information exports to the pointed
folder. The default path and file name are:
• Default path: C:\Users\Current User\Documents\CCW\Project Name
• Default file name: Device Name + _ + YYYYMMDD

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 127


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

Reset
The Reset clears a safety light curtain that is locked out. After you resolve the
lockout condition and press Reset, the safety light curtain powers off and then
powers on. The stick disconnects from the Connected Components
Workbench software because of this power off/on cycle.

Lock
Lock all new and changed configurations before Run mode. The Lock is
enabled if the safety light curtain is in Unlocked mode and is disabled if the
device system is in Run mode. The configuration active window in Figure 110
appears after lock. The safety light curtain disconnects from the Connected
Components Workbench software.
Figure 110 - Configuration Active

Mode
The Mode symbol provides a quick way to determine the operating status of
the safety light curtain.
Symbol Description Explanation

Error Mouse over the icon for additional information.

The configuration is locked, and the safety light curtain is in Run


Run mode.

Unlocked The safety light curtain configuration must be confirmed.

Lock out See the diagnostic 7.1. Upload and select Reset.

Teach Teach only shows when the Connected Components Workbench software
connects to a 450L-E safety light curtain. Teach only enables when:
• The connection plug-in is either catalog number 450L-APR-BL-5 or
catalog number 450L-APR-MU-8,
• The stick status is Run mode after synchronization, and either:
- DIP switch 1 is set to ON, and the Blanking Configuration Type is set to
Push Button Teach-in, or
- DIP switch 1 is set to OFF, and
• Switch 5 is on when you use the catalog number 450L-APR-BL-5, or
128 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024
Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

• Switch 8 is off and switch 9 is on when you use the catalog number
450L-APR-MU-8.

You can also teach blanking in the Blanking Configuration window.

Laser The laser turns the Integrated Laser Alignment on and off. The Laser only
shows when the Connected Components Workbench software connects to a
450L-E safety light curtain.

A confirmation window shows when the laser is turned on or off.

Beam Status The beam status provides a snapshot table of the status of each
individual beam at each lens. The length of the table is equal to the number of
lenses of the connected stick. An example of the beam status table is shown in
Figure 108 on page 127 and provides the following information:
• Connected stick is a Tx or an Rx
• Snapshot date
• Snapshot time
• Cascade number
• Lens number
• Beam status – Free or Blocked
• Beam intensity – Low, Med-Low, Med-High, High, N/A when the beam
status is Blocked
• Blanking status – no blanking, fixed blanking, reduced resolution, or
floating blanking
• Muting status – Free (not muted) or muting active

The export provides the option to export the data in a *.CSV file:
• Default path: C:\Users\Current User\Documents\CCW\Project Name
• Default name: Device Name + _ + BeamStatus + _ + MMddyyyy + _ +
hhmmss

Blanking example – in Figure 111 on page 130, lenses 1 and 2 are fixed blanking.
Beams 3…14 are floating blanking, with beam 10 blocked. Beams 15…18 have no
blanking. Beams 19…31 have reduced resolution and no beams are currently
blocked. Finally, beam 32 has no blanking.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 129


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

Figure 111 - Beams Status –Blanking Example

Two-sensor Muting Figure 112 on page 131 shows an example wiring diagram for two-sensor
Schematic Example muting. The muting sensors connect to pins 1 and 4 of the connection plug-in.
If you do not use the Connected Components Workbench software, the
connections of the muting sensors must be as shown in the schematic. If you
do use the Connected Components Workbench software, the muting sensors
can connect in any of the muting wires and then configured in the Connected
Components Workbench software.

130 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

Figure 112 - Example Schematic for Two Sensor Muting

Muting Sensor 1 Muting Sensor 2


42EF-P2MPB-F4 42EF-P2MPB-F4
Tx Rx
450L-E4FN1200YD 450L-E4FN1200YD
Mute
Dependent
Override
889D- 889D-
F4AC-5 F4AC-5
2 Brown Brown Brown
1 Brown 8 Red Black Black
+24V DC 1 White Blue Blue
2 White (Not Used) White (Not Used) White (Not Used) RESET
4 Yellow
24V Com (0V) 4 Black (Not Used)
5 Gray OSSD1
3 Blue
6 Pink OSSD2
+ + 5 Gray 7 Blue
FE
DC ok S11 S12 S21 S22 S34 A1
3 Green
24- FE SI RESET 0
28V 440R-S12R2
AM
1606-XLP95E MM
N L 450L-APT-PW-5 450L-APR-MU-8
898D-F5NC-5 898D-F8NB-5
13 14 23 24 Y32 L11 A2

120-240V AC
N
L
Primary Protective Earth Ground
PE

In the hardware setup, which is shown in Figure 113, select the muting plug-in
(catalog number 450L-APR-MU-8), as the Connection plug-in Rx. On the
plug-in, set switch 1 to on, and all other switches are off. This step allows the
Connected Components Workbench software to configure the muting setup.
Figure 113 - Hardware Setup

Muting Type and Settings In Figure 114 on page 132, select Muting Type. Since the receiver only has the
muting plug-in, the muting types are limited to two sensors. Select the type of
muting. Select Settings to adjust the muting time parameters.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 131


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

Figure 114 - Select Muting Type

Figure 115 shows the two-sensor muting settings. These settings apply to all
three types of two-sensor muting. Table 60 on page 133 describes the settings.
Select the values appropriate for the application.
Figure 115 - Muting Settings

132 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

Table 60 - Muting Parameters


Parameter Description
Muting type This parameter is a read-only field, setup by the Configuration tab.
This parameter is the maximum time that the material can occupy the safety light curtain.
Maximum muting time If the time is exceeded, the OSSD outputs turn off and the object can be cleared by using
the Mute Dependent Override.
Activation time Specifies the maximum time between sensors. This maximum is the time in which the
between muting object must block both sensors. If the time is exceeded, the muting timing error becomes
sensors T(sens) active and the safety light curtain is not muted.
If set to off, the time from the start of muting to when the object blocks the safety light
Safety light curtain curtain is not used in the muting sequence.
interruption If set to on, specify the time that the safety light curtain must be interrupted after the
monitored T(espe) muting state has been achieved. If the time is exceeded, the OSSD outputs turn off.
Specifies a delay before muting becomes activate.
Muting signal • Max setting: 2550 ms
activation delay time • Default setting: 80 ms
• Min setting: 1 ms
Specifies a delay before muting becomes de-activated.
Muting signal • Max setting: 2550 ms
deactivation delay • Default setting: 50 ms
time • Min setting: 0 ms
• Increment: 10 ms
Specifies the duration of the muting dependent override signal. Use this function to force
the OSSD outputs on after a muting error has occurred. The override signal becomes
Muting dependent active on the trailing edge.
override (MDO) • Max setting: 1275 s
• Min setting: 0 ms
• Increment: 10 ms
Partial muting (user The safety light curtain can be configured to allow muting of a specified number of lenses.
Specify the first lens and last lenses to mute. If the other lenses are blocked, the OSSD
defined) outputs turn off.

GPIO Selection and Settings


Figure 116 shows the GPIO tab. Select GPIO and select the function of the three
inputs. Two of the inputs must be the muting sensors. A likely choice for the
third input is a mute dependent override function.
Figure 116 - General Purpose Input Output Selection

Select Settings IO_x to set Logic and Filter times. Figure 117 on page 134 shows
the options for the GPIO settings.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 133


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

The Logic function for muting the sensor is fixed at LOW Active. When an
object passes in front of the sensor, the sensor output turns off.

Adjust the filter times to help prevent inadvertent changes from the sensor
output from disrupting the muting process. You can adjust the filter times
from 0…255 ms.

Select OK after adjustments are made.


Figure 117 - General Purpose Input Output Selection

Proceed to Download and Upload Configurations on page 154.

Four-sensor Muting Figure 118 on page 135 shows an example wiring diagram for four-sensor
Schematic Example muting. The muting sensors connect to the cascading plug-in. If you do not
use the Connected Components Workbench software, the connections of the
muting sensors must be as shown in the schematic. If you do use the
Connected Components Workbench software, the muting sensors can connect
in any of the muting wires and then configured in the Connected Components
Workbench software.

134 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

Figure 118 - Example Schematic for Four Sensor Muting

Muting Sensor 3 Muting Sensor 4


42EF-P2MPB-F4 42EF-P2MPB-F4

889D-F4AC-5 889D-F4AC-5

2 Brown Brown Brown


Black Black
8 Red Mute Lamp Blue
Blue
1 White MS3 White (Not Used) White (Not Used)
4 Yellow MS4
450L-APC-IO-8
898D-F8NB-5 5 Gray MS1
6 Pink MS2
7 Blue
3 Green Muting Sensor 2 Muting Sensor 1
42EF-P2MPB-F4 42EF-P2MPB-F4
Tx Rx
450L-E4FN1200YD 450L-E4FN1200YD 889D-F4AC-5 889D-F4AC-5
2 Brown Brown Brown
8 Red Black Black RESET
Brown Blue
1 White Aux. Mute Blue
White (Not Used) White (Not Used)
4 Yellow EDM Dependent White (Not Used)
+24V DC Black (Not Used) Override
5 Gray OSSD1
24V Com (0V) Blue 6 Pink OSSD2
Gray 7 Blue
FE
+ + 3 Green
DC ok FE S11 S12 S21 S22 S34 A1
Mute SI 0
24- RESET
Active 440R-S12R2
28V AM
450L-APT-PW-5 450L-APR-MU-8
1606-XLP95E 898D-F5NC-5 898D-F8NB-5 MM
N L
13 14 23 24 Y32 L11 A2

120-240V AC
N
L
Primary Protective Earth Ground
PE

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 135


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

Hardware
Figure 119 shows the hardware settings for four-sensor muting. The receiver
stick requires the muting connection plug-in and the cascading plug-in. When
you select both plug-ins, the Connected Components Workbench software
allows you to select four-sensor muting.
Figure 119 - Hardware Settings for Four Sensor Muting

Muting Type and Settings


Figure 120 shows the Configuration window. There is only one type of
four-sensor muting. Select four sensors, T-type, bidirectional as the muting
type. Select Settings to adjust the muting time parameters.
Figure 120 - Muting Type with Four Sensors

Figure 121 on page 137 shows the four-sensor muting settings. Table 61 on
page 137 describes the muting settings. Select the values appropriate for the
application.

136 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

Figure 121 - Muting Settings

Table 61 - Muting Settings


Setting Description
Muting type This setting is a read-only field, setup by the Configuration tab.
Maximum muting time This setting is the maximum time that the material can occupy the safety light curtain.
Specifies the maximum muting time between sensors. This setting is the time in which the
Activation time object must block both sensors on either side of the safety light curtain. If the time is
between muting exceeded, the muting timing error becomes active, and the light is not be muted. If the
sensors T(sens) object then blocks the second sensor, the muting sequence error becomes active. The
object must be removed from the sensors.
If set to off, the time from the start of muting to when the object blocks the safety light
Safety light curtain curtain is not used in the muting sequence.
interruption If set to on, specify the time that the safety light curtain must be interrupted after muting
monitored T(espe) starts. If the time is exceeded, the OSSD outputs turn off.
Specifies a delay before muting becomes activated.
Muting signal • Max setting: 2550 ms
activation delay time • Default setting: 80 ms
• Min setting: 0 ms
Specifies a delay before muting becomes de-activated.
Muting signal • Max setting: 2550 ms
deactivation delay
time • Default setting: 50 ms
• Min setting: 0 ms
Specifies the duration of the muting dependent override signal. Use this function to force
the OSSD outputs on after a muting error has occurred. The override signal becomes
Muting dependent active on the trailing edge.
override (MDO) • Max setting: 1275 s
• Min setting: 0 s
Partial muting (user The light can be configured to allow muting to a specified number of lenses. Specify the
first lens and last lenses that are muted. If the other lenses are blocked, the OSSD outputs
defined) turn off.

GPIO Selection and Settings


Once you establish the muting settings, set the General Purpose Input and
Output (GPIO). Select the GPIO tab.

Figure 122 on page 138 highlights three sections of the GPIO settings:
1. The connection plug-in has three wiring connections that you can use as
input or output. The I/O are available on connector pins 1, 4, and 8.
2. The cascading plug-in has five wiring connections. You can use three as
input or output, and two as inputs. The I/O are available on connector
pins 4, 8, 1, 5, and 6.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 137


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

3. Initially, a red message box (Mandatory GPIO configuration is not


complete for download) appears. After you make the proper mandatory
selections, the message turns green.
Figure 122 - GPIO Overview

Figure 62 lists the I/O from the example schematic in Figure 118 on page 135.
There are five inputs on the cascading plug-in and one output on the
connection plug-in.
Table 62 - Muting I/O
Plug-in I/O Function Pin
Muting sensor 1 5
Muting sensor 2 6
Input
Cascading Muting sensor 3 1
Muting sensor 4 4
Output Muting lamp 8
Input Muting override 8
Connection Mute timing error 1
Output
Mute sequence error 4

Figure 123 on page 139 shows the settings. Expand the Selection menu for the
cascading plug-in pin 5. The four muting sensors appear as mandatory inputs.
Check Muting Sensor 1, as this sensor connects to pin 5.

138 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

Figure 123 - Select I/O for Pin 5

Select Settings I_1. Figure 124 shows the sensor settings to adjust the sensor
logic and filter times.

The Logic function for muting the sensor is fixed at LOW Active. When an
object passes in front of the sensor, the sensor output turns off.
Adjust the filter times to help prevent inadvertent changes from the sensor
output from disrupting the muting process. You can adjust the filter times
from 0…255 ms.

Select OK after adjustments are complete.


Figure 124 - Muting Sensor Settings

Figure 125 on page 140 shows the final GPIO settings to meet the example
schematic. The mandatory GPIO message box is green.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 139


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

Figure 125 - Final GPIO Muting Settings

Proceed to Download and Upload Configurations on page 154.

Blanking Overview To use the blanking features, the transceiver must have either of these
plug-ins:
• Catalog number 450L-APR-MU-8 – the muting/blanking plug-in
• Catalog number 450L-APR-BL-5 – the blanking plug-in

The 450L-E safety light curtain has three types of blanking:


• Fixed blanking
• Floating blanking
• Reduced resolution blanking

Lens identification and zones help with the implementation of blanking.

Lens Identification
Figure 126 on page 141 shows an example of the identification of the lenses for
both finger and hand resolution for a safety light curtain that has a 300 mm
(11.81 in.) height. Notice the following:
• Lens 1 is the lens closest to the connection plug-in (not the cascading
plug-in). This arrangement is especially important for the hand
resolution as lens (n) is not used.
• Both resolutions have the name number of lenses.
• The even-numbered lenses of hand resolution are not used; the lens ‘n’ is
not used.
• The 450L safety light curtain transceivers are built on 16 lens segments;
the number of lenses (n) is a multiple of 16.

140 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

Figure 126 - Lens Identification Example – 300 mm (11.8 in.) Sensing Height
Finger Resolution 14 mm (0.55 in.)

Lens 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
n=32
Hand Resolution 30 mm (1.18 in.)

Lens 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
n=32
Even-numbered lenses are not used for hand resolution

Connection Plug-ins

Zones
A zone is a range of lenses in the transceivers that are blanked with specific
conditions. You can specify a maximum of eight zones. Use the zones in order
and do not skip. Use the lenses in order, but you can skip lenses. Each zone can
be:
• Fixed blanking
• Floating blanking
• Reduced resolution blanking

The following rules apply to zone specification:


• Zone definition begins with the lowest lens; the lens closest to the
connection plug-in.
• Zones cannot overlap.
• Each zone must be a contiguous set of lenses.
• Each zone can be either fixed, floating, or reduced resolution.
• A non-blanking area is allowed between zones or at either end of the
transceiver. This area is not considered a zone.
• Non-blanked areas can be assigned either:
- Normal operation
- Reduced resolution one object
- Reduced resolution two objects
• You can only block one of the synchronizations (either at the top or the
bottom, but not both top and bottom).

Figure 127 on page 142 shows an example with a finger resolution safety light
curtain. Zone 1 applies fixed blanking (object always present and remains
stationary) between lens 1 and 2. Zone 2 applies floating blanking (the object
can move but must always be present) between lens 3 and 14. Zone 3 applies
reduced resolution between lens 19 and 30. Lenses 31 and 32 are used for
synchronization, and normal operation (finger resolution) applies. The area
from lens 15…18 is also normal operation (finger resolution).

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 141


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

Figure 127 - Three-zone Blanking Example – Finger Resolution

Lens 32 Synchronization
31

Zone 3
Reduced Resolution
19
18
No Blanking
15
14
Zone 2
Floating Blanking
3
2 Zone 1
Lens 1
Fixed Blanking

Connection Plug-ins

142 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

Configuration Options On the configuration window, you can select three blanking types when the
Connected Components Workbench software is disconnected from the safety
light curtain:
• Disable – blanking is not used
• Software configuration – configure for fixed, floating, or reduced
resolution
• Push button Teach-in – use the Teach command button on the Diagnose
window

Fixed Blanking A fixed blanking zone is a set of lenses that are configured to always expect an
object to block the beams. The beams must always be blocked. A fixed zone that
becomes unblocked causes the OSSD outputs of the safety light curtain
receiver to turn off.
The 450L-E safety light curtain accommodates changes in the set of lenses that
can be blocked; this change is the object tolerance. You can set the object
tolerance to zero (no lens tolerance) or to a negative number. The fixed
blanking range can only be smaller by the tolerance number. A positive shift in
the object size or location causes the OSSD outputs to turn off.
The 450L-E safety light curtain uses the first or last beams for synchronization.
If the first beam is blocked, then the last beam cannot be blocked. In contrast,
if the last beam is blocked then the first beam cannot be blocked.

Settings
Figure 128 shows the settings for fixed blanking for Zone 1. You can configure
up to eight zones for fixed blanking or other types of blanking. The teach
blanking zones is enabled for fixed blanking. Table 63 on page 144 describes the
blanking settings. Select the values appropriate for the application.

Reset Zone 1 to Zone 8 – select to clear the settings of the specified zones. The
specified zones are a range from the selected zone to Zone 8.
Figure 128 - Fixed Blanking Settings

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 143


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

Table 63 - Fixed Blanking Settings


Setting Description
Blanking type Select Fixed Blanking.
This number is the first lens, closest to the connection plug-in that participates in
Minimum lens number the range of lenses.
Maximum lens number This number is the last lens that participates in the range of lenses.
Object monitoring Always enabled for fixed blanking.
The safety light curtain allows the object size to be smaller by 0, 1, or 2 lenses for
finger resolution and 0 or 1 (where 1 = 2 lenses) for hand resolution. Select the
Object size tolerance number of lenses that accommodate the variation in the fixed object height and
location.
Select normal operation, reduced resolution one object, or reduced resolution two
Outside blanked zones objects for the other zones.

Fixed Blanking Rules Table 64 shows the rules for fixed blanking within a zone. The Connected
Components Workbench software automatically enforces these blanking
rules. Since the transceiver sticks are synchronized with either the first or last
lens, only one end of the stick can be blocked (not both ends).
Table 64 - Fixed Blanking Rules
Resolution Object Size Include/Exclude Min Lens Value Max Lens Value Rules
[mm (in.)] Tolerance Lens 1
Since lens 1 is blanked, the last lens cannot be blanked.
Include 1 2,3,4…n-1 Max lens must be greater than min lens.
0 Since lens 1 is not blanked, lens 2 cannot be blanked.
Exclude 3,4,5…n 4,5,6…n Max lens must be greater than min lens.
Special case: Min lens and max lens can be n simultaneously.
Since lens 1 is blocked, the last lens cannot be blocked.
Include 1 2,3,4…n-1
Finger (14 [0.55]) Max lens must be greater than min lens.
-1
Max lens must be greater than min lens.
Exclude 3,4,5…n 4,5,6…n Special case: Min lens and max lens can be n simultaneously.
Since lens 1 is blanked, the last lens cannot be blanked.
Include 1 5,6,7…n-1 Max lens must be greater than min lens by a value of 4.
-2
Since lens 1 is not blanked, Lens 2 cannot be blanked.
Exclude 3,4,5…n-3 6,7,8...n Max lens must be greater than min lens by a value of 3.
Since lens 1 is blanked, the last lens cannot be blanked.
Include 1 3,5,7…n-1 Max lens must be an odd number and greater than the min value.
0
Min lens must be an even number equal to or greater than 4.
Exclude 4,6,8…n 5,7,9…n-1 Max lens must be an odd number greater than the min lens.
Hand (30 [1.18]) Since lens 1 is blocked, the last lens cannot be blocked.
Include 1 3,5,7…n-3 Max lens must be an odd number greater than min lens.
-1 Min lens must be an even number equal to or greater than 4.
Max lens must be an odd number greater than the min lens by a value equal
Exclude 4,6,8…n-2 7,9…n-1 to or greater than 3.
Special case: Min lens and max lens can be n simultaneously.

Proceed to Download and Upload Configurations on page 154.

Teach Blanking Zones


The Connected Components Workbench software can learn new
arrangements of fixed blanking. To learn new arrangements, the software
reads the beams, stores the new setting in a project, and then transfers the new
settings down to the safety light curtain. Follow this process.
1. Arrange the fixed object within the safety light curtain field.
2. Connect the Connected Components Workbench software to the safety
light curtain.

144 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

3. Teach the Connected Components Workbench software the new


settings.
4. Download the new settings to the safety light curtain.
5. Upload and confirm (lock) the new settings.

Process Details
Place only the fixed objects in the safety light curtain field. The object can be
singular or multiple fixed objects can be within the safety light curtain field.
Mount the Optical Interface Device onto the receiver. Connect the USB cable
from the computer with the Connected Components Workbench software to
the Optical Interface Device. Turn on the power to the safety light curtain.
1. Select Connect to Device. Wait for the device to connect. When the
connection is made, Diagnose enables, and Download and Upload
disables.
2. Select Blanking Settings. The Blanking configuration type is not
relevant.

3. Teach is enabled. Select Teach Blanking Zones in the Blanking settings.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 145


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

4. The caution message allows you to cancel if necessary. After you read the
message, select OK.

The Teaching in Process window appears. If you configured the safety


light curtain for automatic start, the OSSD outputs are on. The OSSD
outputs momentarily turn off and then back on during the teaching
process.

5. The teach-in process is complete. When completed, the Connected


Components Workbench software generates a message and describes
the number of taught blanking zones. Select OK.

146 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

6. Review the learned blanking settings in each zone. You cannot change
the settings in the Connected Components Workbench software, but you
can select the Teach blanking zones again for the software to relearn the
settings. In this example, two zones have fixed blanking. The Connected
Components Workbench software has learned the new settings. Select
OK.

7. Select Go Offline to disconnect the Connected Components Workbench


software from the safety light curtain.
Figure 129 - Go Offline

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 147


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

8. Select Download with the safety light curtain disconnected. The OSSD
outputs turn off while the new configuration downloads.

9. The download was a success. The downloaded and uploaded CRC values
are the same. Select OK.

10. The Connected Components Workbench software resets. After reset, the
Connected Components Workbench software disconnects from the
safety light curtain, and the message box instructs you to select Upload
or Connect to confirm the new configuration. On the safety light curtain,
the status indicator flashes red/green. The OSSD outputs are off. The
Blanking indicator is off. Select OK.

11. Select Upload. This step uploads the configuration from the safety light
curtain back into the Connected Components Workbench software, so
the new configuration can be confirmed.

148 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

12. The new configuration is waiting for confirmation. The conformation


message provides instructions to confirm the configuration. Select OK.

13. Select Diagnose.

14. Select Lock to confirm the configuration. The safety light curtain cycles
power, and the new configuration is ready for use.

15. The configuration is now active. Select OK.

Floating Blanking Floating blanking allows an object to move within the specified lens range
without causing the safety light curtain OSSD outputs to turn off. The safety
light curtain monitors the presence of the blanking; therefore, the object must
always be within the specified lens range. If the object height is less than the
minimum or more than the maximum number of lenses, the safety light
curtain outputs turn off.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 149


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

Settings
Figure 130 shows the settings for Floating Blanking. You can configure up to
eight zones for floating blanking. The Teach Blanking Zones disable for
floating blanking. Table 65 describes the settings. Select the values appropriate
for the application.
Figure 130 - Floating Blanking Settings

Table 65 - Floating Blanking Settings


Setting Description
Blanking type Select Floating Blanking.
Minimum lens number This setting is the first that participates in the range of lenses.
Maximum lens number This setting is the last lens that participates in the range of lenses.
Object monitoring Always enabled for floating blanking.
Select the number of lenses typically blocked by the object. The number is subject to
Object size certain rules (seeTable 66 on page 151).
The safety light curtain allows the object size to be smaller by either 1 or 2 lenses for
finger resolution and 1 lens for hand resolution. Select the number of lenses that
Object size tolerance accommodate the variation in object size. The number is subject to certain rules
(seeTable 66 on page 151).
Select normal operation, reduced resolution one object, or reduced resolution two
Other zones objects for the other zones.

Floating Blanking Rules


Table 66 on page 151 shows the rules for floating blanking for the minimum
object size. The Connected Components Workbench software enforces these
blanking rules automatically. Since the transceiver sticks are synchronized
with either the first or last beams, only one end of the stick can be blocked (not
both ends).

150 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

Table 66 - Floating Blanking Rules


Include/
Resolution Object Size Object Size Exclude Min Lens Max Lens Rules
Lens
[mm (in.)] (Min) Tolerance Value Value
1
Since lens 1 is blanked, the last lens cannot be blanked.
Include 1 6,7,8…n-1 Max lens must be at least equal to or greater than min lens by a value of 5.
2 -1
8,9,10…n Since lens 1 is not blanked, lens 2 cannot be blanked.
Exclude 3,4,5…n-5
Finger Max lens must be at least equal to or greater than min lens by a value of 5.
(14 [0.55])
7,8,9…n-1 Since lens 1 is blanked, the last lens cannot be blanked.
Include 1 Max lens must be at least equal to or greater than min lens by a value of 6.
3 -2
9,10,11…n Since lens 1 is not blanked, lens 2 cannot be blanked.
Exclude 3,4,5…n-6 Max lens must be at least equal to or greater than min lens by a value of 6.
Since lens 1 is blanked, the last lens cannot be blanked.
Include 1 13, 15…n-3 Max lens must be an odd number at least equal to or greater than the min lens by a
value of 12.
Hand Since lens 1 is not blanked, lens 2 cannot be blanked.
4 -1
(30 [1.18]) Min lens number must be an even number with a value at least equal or greater
Exclude 4,6,8…n-8 15,17…n-1 than 4.
Max lens must be an odd number at least equal to or greater than min lens by a
value of 11.

Object Height
Table 67 shows the formulas for calculating the minimum and maximum
object height. Maintain the height of the object between the minimum and
maximum values for the OSSD outputs to remain on.

Figure 131 on page 152 shows an example of a maximum object size selection of
2 and tolerance of -1 for both finger and hand resolution. For finger resolution,
the beam width is 3.91 mm (0.15 in.). The worst-case tolerance of beam spacing
is 9.42 mm (0.37 in.) for minimum and 9.38 mm (0.37 in.) for maximum. An
object that has a height larger than 13.33 mm (0.52 in.) and less than 14.85 mm
(0.58 in.) does not cause the OSSD outputs to turn off. If the object height falls
below 13.33 mm (0.52 in.) or exceeds 14.85 mm (0.58 in.), the OSSD outputs turn
off.
Table 67 - Object Height Formulas
Resolution Max/Min Formula
[mm (in.)]
Min object height is > (Object Size + Object Size Tolerance) x 9.42 + 3.91
Example with Object Size = 2 and Tolerance = -1
Min >(2 -1) x 9.42 + 3.91
Finger >13.33 mm (0.52 in.)
(14 [0.55]) Max object height is < Object Size x 9.38 - 3.91
Example with Object Size = 2
Max <2 x 9.38 - 3.91
<14.85 mm (0.58 in.)
Min object height is > (Object Size + Object Size Tolerance) x 18.84 + 5.70
Example with Object Size = 2 and Tolerance = -1
Min >(2-1) x 18.84 + 5.70
Hand >24.54 mm (0.97 in.)
(30 [1.18]) Max object height is < Object Size x 18.76 - 5.70
Example with Object Size = 2
Max <2 x 18.76 - 5.70
<31.82 mm (1.25 in.)

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 151


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

Figure 131 - Object Height Example – Object Size = 2, Object Tolerance = -1


Minimum Height [mm (in.)] Maximum Height [mm (in.)]
Finger Resolution
(14 mm [0.55 in.])

3.91 (0.15) 3.91 (0.15)


13.33 (0.52) 9.42 (0.37) 9.38 (0.37)
14.85 (0.58)
9.42 (0.37) 9.38 (0.37)

Hand Resolution
(30 mm [1.18 in.])

5.70 (0.22) 5.70 (0.22)

24.54 (0.97) 18.84 (0.74) 18.76 (0.74)

31.82 (1.25)

18.84 (0.74) 18.76 (0.74)

Reduced Resolution Reduced resolution is similar to floating blanking except the object does not
Blanking need to be in the reduced resolution zone. Reduced resolution blanking is not
monitored blanking.

Settings
Figure 132 shows the setting for reduced resolution blanking. Table 68 on
page 153 describes the settings.
Figure 132 - Reduced Resolution Settings

152 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

Table 68 - Reduced Resolution Settings


Setting Description
Blanking type Select Reduced Resolution.
Minimum lens number This setting is the first lens that participates in the range of lenses.
Maximum lens This setting is the last lens that participates in the range of lenses.
number
Object monitoring Always disabled for reduced resolution.
Select single or multiple objects.
Number of objects Single - The height of the single object must be less than the maximum object size.
Multiple – The sum of the heights of all objects must be less than the maximum object size.
Maximum object size Select the maximum height of the object or objects. The height is subject to certain rules
(see Object Height on page 153).
Other zones Select normal operation, reduced resolution one object, or reduced resolution two objects.

Reduced Resolution Blanking Rules


Table 69 shows the rules for reduced resolution blanking. The Connected
Components Workbench software enforces these blanking rules
automatically. Since the transceiver sticks synchronize with either the first or
last lens, only one end of the stick can be blocked (not both ends).
Table 69 - Reduced Resolution Rules
Resolution Object Size, Max Include/Exclude Lens 1 Lens Value, Min Lens Value, Max Rules
[mm (in.)]
Since lens 1 is blanked, the last lens cannot be blanked.
Max Object Size <= Max Lens – Min Lens - 3
Include 1 5…n-1 Examples:
Max Object Size = 1 and Min = 1, then Max = 5…n-1
Finger Max Object Size = 4 and Min = 1, then Max = 8…n-1
1…31
(14 [0.55]) Since lens 1 is not blanked, lens 2 cannot be blanked.
Max Object Size <= Max Lens – Min Lens - 3
Exclude 3 n Examples:
Max Object Size = 1 and Min = 3, then Max = 7…n
Max Object Size = 4 and Min = 5, then Max = 12…n
Since lens 1 is blanked, the last lens cannot be blanked.
Max Object Size <= Max Lens – Min Lens - 8
Include 1 11,13,15...n-3 Examples:
Max Object Size = 2 and Min = 1, then Max = 11…n-3
Hand Max Object Size = 4 and Min = 1, then Max = 13…n
2,4,6…n-12
(30 [1.18]) Since lens 1 is not blanked, lens 3 cannot be blanked.
Max Object Size <= Max Lens – Min Lens - 7
Exclude 4 13,15,17...n-1 Examples:
Max Object Size = 2 and Min = 4, then Max = 13…n-1
Max Object Size = 4 and Min = 6, then Max = 17…n-1

Object Height
Figure 133 on page 154 shows an example of a maximum object size selection of
two for both finger and hand resolution. For finger resolution, the beam width
is 3.91 mm (0.15 in.), and the worst-case tolerance for beam spacing is 9.38 mm
(0.37 in.). An object that has a height of 14.85 mm (0.58 in.) never blocks more
than two beams. If the third beam is blocked, the OSSD outputs turn off.
Therefore, the maximum height remains less than the formulas in Table 70 on
page 154 to avoid nuisance tripping.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 153


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

Table 70 - Formulas for Max Object Height


Resolution [mm (in.)] Formula
Max object height is < Max Object Size Selection x 9.38 - 3.91
Example with Max Object Size = 2
Finger (14 [0.55]) < 2 x 9.38 - 3.91
< 14.85 mm (0.58 in.)
Max object height is < Max Object Size Selection x 18.76 - 5.70
Example with Max Object Size = 2
Hand (30 [1.18]) < 2 x 18.76 - 5.70
< 31.82 mm (1.25 in.)

Figure 133 - Max Object Height Example [mm (in.)]

3.91 (0.15) 5.70 (0.22)


9.38 (0.37)

14.85 (0.58) 18.76 (0.74)


9.38 (0.37)
31.82(1.25)

18.76 (0.74)

Table 71 shows maximum object size for selections 1…10. Use the appropriate
formula in Table 71 for larger values.
Table 71 - Maximum Object Size Table
If the object height is smaller than…
Select Maximum Object Size
Finger Resolution [mm (in.)] Hand Resolution [mm (in.)]
1 5.47 (0.22) 13.06 (0.51)
2 14.85 (0.58) 31.82 (1.25)
3 24.23 (0.95) 50.58 (1.99)
4 33.61 (1.32) 69.34 (2.73)
5 42.99 (1.69) 88.10 (3.47)
6 52.37 (2.06) 106.86 (4.21)
7 61.75 (2.43) 125.62 (4.95)
8 71.13 (2.80) 144.38 (5.68)
9 80.51 (3.17) 163.14 (6.42)
10 89.89 (3.54) 181.90 (7.16)

Download and Upload To change a configuration in the safety light curtain:


Configurations 1. Download the project to the safety light curtain.
2. Upload the project from the safety light curtain.
3. Lock the configuration.

To change the configuration in the safety light curtain.


1. Go offline (disconnect).
2. Complete the configuration.

154 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

3. Select Download.

The download is successful. The downloaded and uploaded CRC are


identical.
4. Select OK.

The Connected Components Workbench software generates a progress


window during the resetting process.

5. Select Upload to transfer the project from the safety light curtain back to
the Connected Components Workbench software.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 155


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

6. The waiting to confirm message shows. Select OK.

7. Select Diagnose.

8. The screen shows the unlocked Mode icon. Select Lock.

9. The configuration is now active, and the safety light curtain is ready for
use. Select OK.

The following steps are optional to monitor the performance of the safety light
curtain through the Connected Components Workbench software.

156 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

10. Select Connect to device.

11. Select Diagnose.

The diagnostic window and the safety light curtain is locked in Run
mode with no errors.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 157


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

Change Hardware
The Connected Components Workbench software must know the actual
hardware setup before you download a new configuration. If the hardware
changes, for instance you add a cascading plug-in or change from a muting to
a blanking plug-in, perform the following steps to synchronize the hardware
with the Connected Components Workbench software.

After you change the hardware, apply power to the safety light curtain.
1. Select Connect to device.

2. Expand the AB_VPN-1 connection, select 450L, and select OK.

3. The hardware settings do not match. Select OK.

4. The new configuration awaiting confirmation. Select OK.

158 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

5. Select Diagnose.

6. Select Lock.

The safety light curtain can now be configured using the new hardware.

Share Your Project (Export/ You can share projects and devices with the Import and Export routines. You
Import) can export complete projects to a Connected Components Workbench
software archive file and individual devices to a zip file.

Export Project to an Archive


1. Select File > Export Project.
This approach creates a small file that you can import to the Connected
Components Workbench software. Use this method when you have only
one device, or multiple devices that are included in one project. The
archive file includes all four devices.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 159


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

2. The Connected Components Workbench software exports the archive


file in the default directory Import_Export. Type in a filename and select
Save. The only file type is *.ccwarc.

3. The Connected Components Workbench software generates a


confirmation and displays the message in the Output window. The
message shows the file path and filename.

Import Project from an Archive


When an archive file imports into the Connected Components Workbench
software, the current project is closed without saving, and replaced by the
imported project.
1. Select File > Import Project on the main menu. The Connected
Components Workbench software opens the default Import_Export
directory.

160 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

2. Select the CCWARC file to import. The name appears in the File name
field. Select Open.

3. If the filename exists, the Connected Components Workbench software


creates a project by incrementing a number at the end of the filename.
My_450L Project_2 is created. Select OK.

Export Device to a Zip File


Use this method if you have multiple devices in one project and want to share
the configuration of only one device. This approach creates a 7-Zip (free
software) directory of files. After expanding the files, you can import the files
can to the Connected Components Workbench software.
1. Right-click the device in the Project Organizer and select export.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 161


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

2. Select the directory; type in a filename and select Save.

3. The Connected Components Workbench software does not provide a


confirmation message. To confirm the export, follow the export file path.

Import a Zip File


1. Right-click the device in the Project Organizer. Then select Import. This
process replaces the configuration of the selected device with the
imported configuration.

162 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

Search for the directory that contains the desired 7z file. Highlight the
filename and select Open. The configuration imports to the selected
Connected Components Workbench software device.

Update Firmware Each release of the Connected Components Workbench software includes
updated versions of the firmware. Both the optical interface device and the
safety light curtain contain firmware. You can also update the firmware with
the ControlFLASH™ software.
1. In the Project Organizer, right-click the device name or its icon (450L_1).
Then select either Update Firmware 450K-stick or Update Firmware OID
(450L-AD-OID).

2. Follow the instructions in the message box. If you update the firmware in
the OID, then the OID must not mount on the safety light curtain. If you
update the firmware in the safety light curtain, then the OID must
mount on the safety light curtain with the safety light curtain powered.
Select OK.

Stick OID
The Connection Browser with connections to the Stick and the OID.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 163


Chapter 9 Connected Components Workbench Software

3. In the Connection Browser, expand the AB_VBP-1. Both the OID and the
safety light curtain show. One of the two always have an X over its icon. If
you update the safety light curtain, the OID is not available. If you update
the OID, the safety light curtain is not available. Select 450L. Select OK.

Stick OID
4. Verify the target revision or select a revision from the dropdown menu
and select Update.

Stick OID
The screen shows the progress of the update.

5. The screen shows a courtesy message. If you update the sticks, you must
update both sticks. Select OK.

If both sticks are powered and properly aligned, both sticks update
simultaneously. If both sticks are slightly misaligned, the update can fail.
If your update fails, block the top and bottom synchronization beams
and update the sticks individually.
Best practice is to mount the OID on the other stick. Check the revision.
If the current revision is not the same as the target revision, then repeat
the update procedure.

164 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Appendix A

Specifications

This appendix provides the specifications for 450L-B and 450L-E safety light
curtains.

Safety Ratings Table 72 - Safety Ratings


Attribute Value
Standards IEC 61508, EN/ISO 13849-1, IEC 62061, UL 508 (see rok.auto/certifications for the latest
Declaration of Conformity)
Type 4 according to IEC 61496-1/-2
Up to PLe (Category 4) per ISO 13849-1,
Safety classification SIL 3 per IEC 61508
SIL CL 3 per IEC 62061
Laser alignment of 450L-E safety light curtain: Laser class 2 according to IEC 60285-1.
450L-B; Pair (including any connection plug-in)
• PFHD: 12.7 10-9
• Mission time/PTI: 20 years
• Mode of operation: High Demand mode
• 450L-E: Pair (including any connection plug-in)
• Pair: PFHD: 12.7 10-9
• Cascading plug-in PFHD: 0.96 10-9
• Mission time/PTI: 20 years
Functional safety data • Mode of operation: High Demand mode
450L PAC; Pair (including any connection plug-in)
• 1-beam pair: 2.44 10-9
• 2-beam pair: 3.87 10-9
• 3-beam pair: 4.81 10-9
• 4-beam pair: 5.27 10-9
• Cascading plug-in PFHD: 0.96 10-9
• Mission time/PTI: 20 years
• Mode of operation: High Demand mode

Operating Characteristics Table 73 - Operating Characteristics


Attribute Value
Switch function OSSDs enable (on, high, 24V DC) when protective field not interrupted
Protective field length 150…1950 mm (5.91…76.77 in.) in 150 mm (5.91 in.) increments
Resolution Finger: 14 mm (0.56 in.); Hand: 30 mm (1.19 in.) or PAC (perimeter)
Number of active lenses (see Figure 11 Finger: 16 per 150 mm (5.91 in.) increment;
on page 23) Hand: 8 per 150 mm (5.91 in.) increment
450L-B:
• Resolution 14 mm (0.56 in.): 0.5…4 m (1.64…13.12 ft)
• Resolution 30 mm (1.19 in.): 0.9…7.0 m (2.95…22.97 ft)
• Reduced operating range (selected with DIP switch):
– Resolution 14 mm (0.56 in.): 0.9…2 m (2.95…6.56 ft)
– Resolution 30 mm (1.19 in.): 1.2…3.5 m (3.94…11.48 ft)
Operating range
450L-E and 450L PAC(1)
• Resolution 14 mm (0.56 in.): 0.5…9 m (1.64…29.53 ft)
• Resolution 30 mm (1.19 in.): 0.9…16.2 m (2.95…53.15 ft)
• Reduced operating range (selected with DIP switch):
– Resolution 14 mm (0.56 in.): 0.9…4.5 m (2.95…14.76 ft)
– Resolution 30 mm (1.19 in.): 1.2…8.0 m (3.94…26.25 ft)

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 165


Appendix A Specifications

Table 73 - Operating Characteristics (Continued)


Attribute Value
450L-B
• OSSD – on to off
• Finger resolution <25 ms
• Hand resolution < 15 ms (for details see Response Time on page 46)
• 450L-E
• OSSD – on to off (no blanking, muting, beam coding, or cascading functionality is
Response time configured)
• Finger resolution <20 ms
• Hand resolution <13 ms (for detail see Response Time on page 46)
450L PAC
• OSSD - on to off (no muting, beam coding, or cascading functionality is configured)
• <20 ms (for detail see Response Time on page 46)
Power up time, max 5s
OSSD restart time after clearance of
the protective field if automatic reset 210 ms (see Response Time on page 46)
Power supply 24V DC ±15%; NEC Class 2 (U.S.). PELV per IEC 60204-1.
450L-B protective height:
• 150 mm (5.91 in.): 64 mA maximum
• 1950 mm (76.77 in.): 214 mA
(outputs not loaded)
450L-E protective height:
• 150 mm (5.91 in.): 70 mA maximum
• 1950 mm (76.77 in.): 221 mA
Power consumption (single stick) (output not loaded)
450L-APC-IO-8: additional 40 mA (with termination plug)
450L-PAC number of beams:
• 1: 70 mA
• 2: 108 mA
• 3: 133 mA
• 4: 145 mA
(outputs not loaded)
450L-APC-IO-8: additional 40 mA (with termination plug)
Peak current during power-up cycle 800 mA maximum (outputs not loaded)
Duration of peak current during 100 ms
power-up cycle
Power down time (OSSD<2V) 3000 ms
Transmitted infrared wave length Infrared (wave length 855 nm)
Aperture angle Within ±2.5° at 3 m (9.8 ft)
Synchronization Optical
Depends on inserted plug-in:
• 450L-B: Start mode; external device monitoring (EDM); maximum operating range
DIP switch selectable functions • 450L-E: Start mode; external device monitoring (EDM); maximum operating range,
beam coding, interference rejection, blanking, muting
• 450L PAC: Start mode; external device monitoring (EDM); maximum operating range,
beam coding, muting
Lifetime expectancy • DIP switch on plug-in: 1000 cycles
• Plug-in on transceiver stick: 50 cycles
• Incandescent lamp: 3000 lux or less
Ambient light • Sunlight: 100,000 lux or less
(1) 450L PAC is based on 450L-E 30 mm hardware.

Inputs Receiver, Cascading, Table 74 - Inputs Receiver Plug-in, Cascading Plug-in, and Universal Plug-in
and Universal Plug-ins
Attribute Value
Minimum duration 50 ms; maximum duration 5 seconds
Voltage level for Logic Low/0: 0…5V DC
Input manual start Voltage level for Logic Hi/1: > 16V DC
Current: 7 mA typical
300 ms after activation of OSSD
Voltage level for Logic Low/0: 0…5V DC
Input EDM Voltage level for Logic Hi/1: > 16V DC
Current: 7 mA typical
Voltage level for Logic Low/0:0…5V DC
Input muting sensors Voltage level for Logic Hi/1:>16V DC
Current: 7 mA typical

166 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Appendix A Specifications

Safety Outputs (OSSDs): Table 75 - Safety Outputs (OSSDs): Receiver Plug-in


Receiver Plug-in
Attribute Value
Safety outputs (OSSDs) Two solid-state outputs
Switching capacity 500 mA each, maximum
Off-current, max <2 mA
Residual voltage (drop from power
2V (excl. voltage drop through cables), maximum
supply)
Connection cable length 100 m (330 ft) maximum with 22 AWG;
Condition: power supply 24V and maximum load on outputs 50 mA total
Switching voltage to HIGH (Ueff) 11…30 V
Switching voltage to LOW -3…2V
Load capacity 0.5 μF maximum
Short circuit protection Yes
Test pulse data See OSSD Output on page 91
Short circuit detection Yes
Galvanic isolation: 1/O from Logic No

Status Outputs Table 76 - Status Outputs


Attribute Value
Receiver plug-in: Up to three nonsafety solid-state outputs (depends on plug-in)
Number of status outputs I/O-cascading plug-in: Up to three solid-state outputs (depends on configuration)
Switching capacity 200 mA each, maximum
Residual voltage (drop from power
2V (excl. voltage drop through cables), maximum
supply)
Short circuit protection Yes
Galvanic isolation: I/O from Logic No

Environmental and General Table 77 - Environmental and General Protection


Protection
Attribute Value
Operating temperature -10…+55 °C (14…131 °F)
Storage temperature -25…+75 °C (-13…+167 °F)
Operating humidity 5… 95% (without condensation)
Enclosure rating IP65

Vibration resistance Per IEC 61496-1 Edition 4 (Class 3M7), IEC 60068-2-6 frequency 10…150 Hz,
amplitude 10 mm (0.39 in.), acceleration 3 g
Shock Per IEC 61496-1 Edition 4 (Class 3M7), IEC 60068-2-27, acceleration 25 g, duration 6 ms
Pollution level 2

Electrical Protection Table 78 - Electrical Protection


Attribute Value
Short circuit protection Incorporated
Current limitation Incorporated
Overload protection Incorporated
Reverse polarity protection Incorporated
Overvoltage protection Incorporated (up to 60V max)
Thermal shutdown/restart Incorporated

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 167


Appendix A Specifications

General Table 79 - General


Attribute Value
Transceiver stick (450L-B) or 450L-E (including 450L PAC models):
• Profile: Extruded aluminum, powder coated
• End caps: Polyamide
• Front window: Polycarbonate
• Screws: Steel
Plug-in (450L-AP):
• Pig tail cable: Polyurethane
• M12 Connector: Bare copper, SR-PVC, PUR
• Body: Polyamide
Top/bottom (Cat. No. 450L-AM-TBM) mounting brackets:
• Bracket: Steel, powder coated
Materials • Screws: Steel
Side mounting brackets (Cat. No. 450L-AM-SM):
• Body: Polyamide
• Screws: Steel
Replacement brackets (Cat. No. 450L-AM-RK):
• Bracket: Aluminum, black anodized
• Screws: Steel
Laser-alignment tool bracket (Cat. No. 450L-ALAT-C):
• Bracket: Polyamide
• Test rod: Aluminum
• Optical interface device (Cat. No. 450L-AD-OID): Polyamide
Stick dimensions • Cross section: 30 x 30 mm (1.19 x 1.19 in.)
• Length: N x 150 mm (N x 5.9 in.) [N = 1 … 13]
• Top/bottom mounting bracket: 0.7 N•m (6.2 lb•in) M3 x 10 Phillips screw
Torque, max • Side mounting bracket: 11 N•m (97.36 lb•in) M6; 2.8 N•m (24.78 lb•in) M4
• Plug-in: 0.38 N•m (3.4 lb•in) M2 x 8 Phillips screw
450L-B, 450L-E, and 450L-PAC:
• Transceiver type (Rx or Tx)
• Status
• Intensity (for two regions)
• Start/Restart
Indicators stick • Output
450L-E and 450L PAC only:
• Muting
• Blanking
• Cascading
Depending on installed plug-in:
M12 5-pin (plug) or M12 8-pin (plug) fixed at pigtail with cable length:
Connection plug-ins: 150 mm (11.81 in.)
Connection plug I/O cascading plug-in: 60 mm (2.36 in.);
Minimum outer bend radius of pigtail: > 3xD:
5-pin: D = 4.4 mm (0.17 in.)
8-pin: D = 5.5 mm (0.22 in.)
Maximum 100 m (330 ft) with wire section AWG 22 (Condition: Power supply 24V
Connection cable length
and maximum load on outputs 50 mA total)
Accessories included Test rod, top/bottom mounting brackets and installation instruction
The unit does not release any silicone or other LABS-critical substances and is
Silicon suitable for use in paint shops.

168 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Appendix A Specifications

Certifications
See the Product Certification link at rok.auto/certifications for Declaration of
Conformity, Certificates, and other certification details:
• cULus Listed Industrial Control Equipment, which is certified for US and
Canada
• CE Marked for all applicable directives (see CE Conformity on page 169)
• UKCA marked for all applicable regulations
• RCM marked (Australia)
• TÜV Rheinland-certified for functional safety up to SIL 3 Category 4 for
use in safety applications up to and including SIL 3, in accordance with
IEC 61508 and EN 62061, Performance Level e and Category 4 in
accordance with ISO 13849-1, ESPE type 4 safety light curtain according
to EN IEC 61496. TÜV Rheinland confirmed that the laser class of the
integrated laser alignment tool that is integrated in all 450L safety light
curtain sticks conforms to laser class 2 of IEC 60825-1.

CE Conformity
Rockwell Automation declares that the products that are shown in this
document conform with the 2014/30/EU Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directive (EMC) and 2006/42/EC Machinery Directive (MD) and that the
respective standards and/or technical specifications have been applied.

For a comprehensive CE certificate visit: rok.auto/certifications

UKCA Conformity
Rockwell Automation declares that the products that are shown in this
document are in compliance with 2016 No. 1091 Electromagnetic Compatibility
Regulations and 2008 No. 1597 Supply of Machinery (Safety) Regulations and
that the respective standards and/or technical specifications have been
applied.

For a comprehensive UKCA certificate visit: rok.auto/certifications

Approximate Dimensions
450L-B and 450L-E safety light curtain transceiver sticks have the same
dimensions. The only difference is that the 450L-E safety light curtain sticks
have an additional slot, which allows the insertion of a cascading plug-in and
the connection plug-in. 450L PAC safety light curtain models are based on
450L-E safety light curtain hardware.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 169


Appendix A Specifications

Figure 134 - 450L Safety Light Curtain Stick Dimensions [mm (in.)] (Table 80 on page 175)
30
(1.18)
30 30
30 (1.18) (1.18)
(1.18)

A B C D

17.60
(0.69)
42.50
(1.67)
13 8 14.90
(0.51) (0.31) (0.59)
29.90 7.60
(1.18) (0.30)

170 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Appendix A Specifications

Figure 135 - 450L PAC Safety Light Curtain Stick Dimensions [mm (in.)]
4-Beam

Active
3-Beam
149
(5.87)

Active
150
(5.91)

Passive
2-Beam 150
(5.91)

Active
150

Passive
(5.91)

Active
300 150
(11.81) (5.91)

300 1050
600 (11.81) 600 900 900 (41.33) 150 1050
(23.62) (23.62) (35.43) (35.43) (5.91) (41.33)

900

900

Passive
Passive

150

Active
(5.91)

Active
150
(5.91)
Active

1.95 150

Passive
(0.04) (5.91)
150

Passive
(5.91)
30
(1.18) 30 147.9

Active
(1.18) (5.82)

149

Active
30 30 (5.87)
(1.18) (1.18)
30 30
(1.18) (1.18)

Product Selection Sticks


The catalog number refers to a stick, including top/bottom mounting kit and
test rod.
450L - B 4 H N - 0750 - Y D
a b c d

a b c d
Transceiver Stick
Resolution [mm (in.)] Laser Alignment Protected Height [mm (in.)]
Type
Code Description Code Description Code Description Code Description Code Description
B Basic Hand Not 0150 150 (5.91) 1200 1200 (47.28)
H (30 [1.19]) N integrated
E Enhanced 0300 300 (11.82) 1350 1350 (53.19)
Finger L Integrated 0450 450 (17.73) 1500 1500 (59.1)
F (14 [0.56] 0600 600 (23.64) 1650 1650 (65.01)
0750 750 (29.55) 1800 1800 (70.92)
0900 900 (35.46) 1950 1950 (76.83)
1050 1050 (41.37)

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 171


Appendix A Specifications

Cat. No. (1)(2) Approximate


Protective Field Shipping Weight Shipping Dimensions
Length Resolution Resolution (With Packaging) [mm (in.)]
[mm (in.)] 14 mm (0.56 in.) 30 mm (1.19 in.) [kg (lb)]
150 (5.90) 860 x 111 x 68
450L-x4Fy0150YD 450L-x4Hy0150YD 0.59 (1.3) (33.86 x 4.37 x 2.68)
860 x 111 x 68
300 (11.81) 450L-x4Fy0300YD 450L-x4Hy0300YD 0.72 (1.59) (33.86 x 4.37 x 2.68)
860 x 111 x 68
450 (17.72) 450L-x4Fy0450YD 450L-x4Hy0450YD 0.85 (1.87) (33.86 x 4.37 x 2.68)
1310 x 111 x 68
600 (32.62) 450L-x4Fy0600YD 450L-x4Hy0600YD 0.98 (2.16) (51.57 x 4.37 x 2.68)
1310 x 111 x 68
750 (29.53) 450L-x4Fy0750YD 450L-x4Hy0750YD 1.11 (2.45) (51.57 x 4.37 x 2.68)
1310 x 111 x 68
900 (35.43) 450L-x4Fy0900YD 450L-x4Hy0900YD 1.24 (2.73) (51.57 x 4.37 x 2.68)
1760 x 111 x 68
1050 (41.34) 450L-x4Fy1050YD 450L-x4Hy1050YD 1.37 (3.02) (69.29 x 4.37 x 2.68)
1760 x 111 x 68
1200 (47.24) 450L-x4Fy1200YD 450L-x4Hy1200YD 1.5 (3.3) (69.29 x 4.37 x 2.68)
1350 (53.15) 1760 x 111 x 68
450L-x4Fy1350YD 450L-x4Hy1350YD 1.63 (3.59) (69.29 x 4.37 x 2.68)
2360 x 111 x 68
1500 (59.05) 450L-x4Fy1500YD 450L-x4Hy1500YD 1.77 (3.90) (92.91 x 4.37 x 2.68)
2360 x 111 x 68
1650 (64.96) 450L-x4Fy1650YD 450L-x4Hy1650YD 1.91 (4.21) (92.91 x 4.37 x 2.68)
2360 x 111 x 68
1800 (70.86) 450L-x4Fy1800YD 450L-x4Hy1800YD 2.05 (4.52) (92.91 x 4.37 x 2.68)
2360 x 111 x 68
1950 (76.77) 450L-x4Fy1950YD 450L-x4Hy1950YD 2.18 (4.81) (92.91 x 4.37 x 2.68)
(1) x = B (450L-B), E (450L-E)
(2) y = N (450L-B), L (450L-E)

450L PAC Catalog Number Explanation


450L - E4 A1 L - 0150 - Y D
a b c d

a b c d
All versions based on 450L-E Number of Beams Integrated Laser Protected Height [mm (in.)]
Alignment System
Code Description Code Description
A1 1 0150 150 (5.91)
A2 2 0600 600 (23.64)
A3 3 0900 900 (35.46)
A4 4 1050 1050 (41.37)

172 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Appendix A Specifications

Plug-ins
450L - APR - ON - 5N
a b c

a b c
Plug-in Type Function Number of Pins
Code Description Code Description Code Description
APR Accessory plug-in receiver PW Power 5 5-pin
Accessory plug-in
APT ON On/Off 8 8-pin
transmitter
APU Accessory plug-in universal ED EDM
APC Accessory plug-in UN Universal
cascading
BK Blanking
MU Muting
IO I/O cascading

Description Cat. No.


450L plug-in Tx 5-pin 450L-APT-PW-5
450L plug-in Tx 8-pin 450L-APT-PW-8
450L plug-in Rx on/off 5-pin 450L-APR-ON-5
450L plug-in Rx EDM 8-pin 450L-APR-ED-8
450L plug-in universal 8-pin 450L-APU-UN-8
450L plug-in blanking 5-pin 450L-APR-BL-5
450L plug-in muting 8-pin 450L-APR-MU-8
450L plug-in cascading 8-pin 450L-APC-IO-8

Figure 136 - 450L Connection Plug-in Dimensions [mm (in.)]


Ø1.84 Ø1.84
(0.57) (0.57)
450L-APR-ON-5
32880/5601 1337
1234
67.5 (2.66)
40.5 (1.59)
114 (4.49) 148 (5.83)
198 (7.79)

Figure 137 - 450L-APC-IO-8 Cascading Plug-in Dimensions [mm (in.)]


Ø14.5
Ø5.3
(0.57) 46.5 (0.21)
(1.83)

60 (2.36) 107 (4.21)

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 173


Appendix A Specifications

Optional Accessories
Description Cat. No.
L-shaped end-cap mounting bracket kit (two per package), shipped with each stick (see 450L-AM-TBM
Standard Top/Bottom Mounting Kit on page 76)
Side mounting bracket (2 kits per pair) (see Side Mounting Bracket on page 78) 450L-AM-SM
Replacement mounting kit (see Replacement Mounting Kit on page 80) 450L-AM-RK
445L bracket (2 kits per pair) 445L-AF6140
445L bracket (180°) (2 kits per pair) 445L-AF6141
Shock mount kit (2 kits required per pair) (see Shock Mounting Kit on page 79) 445L-AF6142
Power supply Output—24V DC, 3 amps, 72 W (see Power Supply on page 89) 1606-XLP72E
Laser alignment tool (see Alignment Tool and Bracket on page 178) 440L-ALAT
450L-B laser alignment tool bracket (see Alignment Tool and Bracket on page 178) 450L-ALAT-C
Optical Interface Device (including USB cable) (see Optical Interface Device (OID) on 450L-AD-OID
page 106)
450L stick slot cover (plug-in slot, one red slot cover shipped with each 450L-B stick; one
red and one gray slot cover shipped with each 450L-E stick). (see Cascading on page 43 450L-AS-1
and Figure 7 on page 15)
Muting distribution block 450L-AMOD-MUT
Muting station 450L-AMUT-IL
Muting lamp 800F-MUT-2-MS
Mounting stand (column) (see Mounting Columns on page 177) 440L-AMSTD
Mounting stand (column) (See publication 445L-UM004) 445L-AMSTD2M
Corner mirror (xxxx = 0300…1800 mm [11.8…70.86 in.] in 150 mm [5.9 in.] increments) (see 440L-AM075xxxx
Mirrors on page 67)
Corner mirror (xxxx = 0300…1800 mm [11.8…70.86 in.] in 150 mm [5.9 in.] increments) (see 440L-AM125xxxx
Mirrors on page 67)
Mirror mounting bracket (see Corner Mirror on page 175) 442L-AF6106
Weld shield (xxxx = 0150…1950 mm [5.9…76.77 in.] in 150 mm [5.9 in.] increments) (see
Weld Shields on page 179) 450L-AW-xxxx
T-connector (see T-connector on page 95) 1485P-RDR5
Guardmaster® SI safety relay (see Guardmaster SI Safety Relay on page 94) 440R-S12R2
Guardmaster CI safety relay 440R-S13R2
Guardmaster D safety relay 440R-D22R2
Guardmaster DIS safety relay 440R-D22S2
MSR42 safety relay 440R-P226AGS-NNR
CR30 software configurable safety relay 440C-CR30-22BBB
100S:
100S-C09QJ14BC,
100S-C43QJ22BC
External contactor
700S:
700S-CF53QDJBC
(or minor variations)
Test rod 14 mm (0.55 in.) (shipped with each stick that has finger resolution) 450L-AT-14
(see Regular Inspection on page 109)
Test rod 30 mm (1.18 in.) (shipped with each stick that has hand resolution) 450L-AT-30
(see Regular Inspection on page 109)
Test rod 40 mm (1.57 in.) (see Regular Inspection on page 109) 450L-AT-40
Termination plug, M12, 8 pin (see Cascading and Blanking on page 46) 898D-81CU-DM
Termination cap, M12, 8 pin (see Cascading and Blanking on page 46) 1485A-M12

174 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Appendix A Specifications

Corner Mirror
Specially constructed glass mirrors for two-sided and three-sided safeguard
applications (see Mirrors on page 67 for installation).

IMPORTANT Each mirror reduces the maximum scan range by 10%. Each corner
mirror is supplied with two end-cap mounting brackets (catalog number
442L-AF6106).
Figure 138 - Dimensions of Narrow Mirror 440L-AM075 [mm (in.)]
8 x 13 50 (1.96)

73 (2.87)

B L Ls A

10.5
(0.41)
4.5
A 2.5
A (0.09) (0.17)

6.5
(0.25)
+/- 120° 13.3 Section
A-A
(5.24)
75
35 54 44.4 (2.95)
(1.37) (2.12) (1.74)
114 (4.48)

Table 80 - Narrow Mirror (Width 75 mm [2.95 in.]) Short Range (0…4 m [0…13.12 ft])
Protective Height
Cat. No. Series Description L LS A B 450L [mm]
Mirror, 300 mm (11.81 in.),
440L-AM0750300 A 396 340 372 440 300
0…4 m (0…13.12 ft)
Mirror, 450 mm (17.72 in.),
440L-AM0750450 A 546 490 522 590 450
0…4 m (0…13.12 ft)
Mirror, 600 mm (23.62 in.),
440L-AM0750600 A 696 640 672 740 600
0…4 m (0…13.12 ft)
Mirror, 750 mm (29.53 in.),
440L-AM0750750 A 846 790 822 890 750
0…4 m (0…13.12 ft)
Mirror, 900 mm (35.43 in.),
440L-AM0750900 A 996 940 972 1040 900
0…4 m (0…13.12 ft)
Mirror, 1050 mm (41.34 in.),
440L-AM0751050 A 1146 1090 1122 1190 1050
0…4 m (0…13.12 ft)
Mirror, 1200 mm (47.24 in.),
440L-AM0751200 A 1296 1240 1272 1340 1200
0…4 m (0…13.12 ft)
Mirror, 1350 mm (53.15 in.),
440L-AM0751350 A 1446 1390 1422 1490 1350
0…4 m (0…13.12 ft)
Mirror, 1500 mm (59.05 in.),
440L-AM0751500 A 1596 1540 1572 1640 1500
0…4 m (0…13.12 ft)
Mirror, 1650 mm (64.96 in.),
440L-AM0751650 A 1746 1690 1722 1790 1650
0…4 m (0…13.12 ft)
Mirror, 1800 mm (70.86 in.),
440L-AM0751800 A 1896 1840 1872 1940 1800
0…4 m(0…13.12 ft)

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 175


Appendix A Specifications

Figure 139 - Dimensions of Wide Mirror 440L-AM125 [mm (in.)]


Section A 164 (6.45)

"Z"
44.4 54 35
75 (174) (2.12) (1.37)
(2.65)
13.3
6.5 (0.52) ±120°
(0.25)
2.5 (0.09)

"Z"
164 (6.45)
4.5 50
(0.17) 10.5 (1.96)
(0.41)

A A

Ls L
340 396
(13.4) (15.60)
A B
372 440
(14.64) (17.32)

123 (4.84)

50 50
(1.96) (1.96)
8 X 13

Table 81 - Wide Mirror (Width 125 mm [4.92 in.]) Long Range (4…15 m [13.12…49.21 ft])
Protective Height
Cat. No. Series Description L LS A B 450L [mm]
Mirror, 300 mm (11.81 in.),
440L-AM1250300 A 396 340 372 440 300
4…15 m (13.12…49.21 ft)
Mirror, 450 mm (17.72 in.),
440L-AM1250450 A 546 490 522 590 450
4…15 m (13.12…49.21 ft)
Mirror, 600 mm (23.62 in.),
440L-AM1250600 A 696 640 672 740 600
4…15 m (13.12…49.21 ft)
Mirror, 750 mm (29.53 in.),
440L-AM1250750 A 846 790 822 890 750
4…15 m (13.12…49.21 ft)
Mirror, 900 mm (35.43 in.),
440L-AM1250900 A 996 940 972 1040 900
4…15 m (13.12…49.21 ft)
Mirror, 1050 mm (41.34 in.),
440L-AM1251050 A 1146 1090 1122 1190 1050
4…15 m (13.12…49.21 ft)
Mirror, 1200 mm (47.24 in.),
440L-AM1251200 A 1296 1240 1272 1340 1200
4…15 m (13.12…49.21 ft)
Mirror, 1350 mm (53.15 in.),
440L-AM1251350 A 1446 1390 1422 1490 1350
4…15 m (13.12…49.21 ft)
Mirror, 1500 mm (59.05 in.),
440L-AM1251500 A 1596 1540 1572 1640 1500
4…15 m (13.12…49.21 ft)
Mirror, 1650 mm (64.96 in.),
440L-AM1251650 A 1746 1690 1722 1790 1650
4…15 m (13.12…49.21 ft)
Mirror, 1800 mm (70.86 in.),
440L-AM1251800 A 1896 1840 1872 1940 1800
4…15 m (13.12…49.21 ft)

176 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Appendix A Specifications

Figure 140 - 442L-AF6106 Swivel Mounting Bracket for Corner Mirrors


3.8 (0.15) 44.4
(1.75)

13
8 (0.3 (0.51) 44 (1.73)
1)

30.6
(1.2)

75 (2.95)

42
(1.65)

Mounting Columns
Two stands are available to mount sticks or mirrors. To mount the 450L safety
light curtain transceiver stick at any height of the catalog number
440L-AMSTD, use the side-mounting kit (catalog number 450L-AM-SM).
Figure 141 - 440L-AMSTD Mounting Column

25.4 63.5 (2.5)


(1.0)

1828.8
(72)
11.1 (7/16) Dia.

19.05 (0.75)
12.7 (0.5) Dia. 4X

76.2
6.35 (3.0)
(0.25) M10 x 1.5 mm
Class 6g thru 4 pl
76.2 381.0 (15)
304.8 (3.0)
(12) 63.5
(2.5)
25.4
(1.0)
6.35
Pedestal floor stand (0.25)

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 177


Appendix A Specifications

Figure 142 - 440L-AMSTD2M

2000
(78.7)

2015
(79.3)

24 (0.94)

M12
3x

30 (1.18)
R5
.50 30 (1.18)
(0.2 150
10° 2) (5.91)
100
60 60 (3.94)
(2.36) (2.36)
12 (4.13)
R 105
(0.47) 14 30
(0.55) (1.18)
240 (9.45)
Base Plate

Alignment Tool and Bracket


Optional laser-alignment tool (laser class 2) and alignment tool bracket.
Figure 143 - Laser Alignment Tool (Catalog Number 440L-ALAT)
19.05
66.8 (0.75)
(2.63) 12.19
(0.48)

62.48 4.0
(2.46) (0.15)

Figure 144 - Alignment Tool Bracket (Catalog Number 450L-ALAT-C)

178 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Appendix A Specifications

Weld Shields Figure 145 - Weld Shield Dimensions


Highly polished transparent surface on both sides

29 38.1 (±0.5)
(1.5 ±0.02) (0.18)
(1.14) 2X R4.6
12.7 (±0.5)
(0.5 ±0.02)

2X
R1.
"L"

6
(0.
06
)
Weld shields for the GuardShield™ safety light curtain are sold in the same
lengths as the protective field heights of the GuardShield safety light curtains.
These polycarbonate weld shields are designed as disposable devices whose
purpose is to help protect the front window of the GuardShield safety light
curtain from damage.
One weld shield reduces the operation range by approximately 10%. For a 450L
safety light curtain with finger resolution with a weld shield that is installed on
each stick, the maximum range of operation reduces to: 7.0 m (22.97 ft) x 90% x
90% = 5.67 m (18.61 ft). The installation of the weld shields does not affect the
minimum operation range.
Table 82 - Weld Shield Kits
Description Cat. No.
Weld shield kit, two pieces per kit safety light curtain, length xxxx mm [xxxx: 0150…1950 mm 450L-AW-xxxx
(5.9…76.77 in.) in 0150 mm (5.9 in.) increments]

The weld shield is supplied with precut hook and loop tape strips. Position the
strips on the front window and attach the weld shields. Additional information
about the weld shields is provided in the publication 450L-IN001.

Cables Depending on the plug-in, an M12 5-pin or a M12 8-pin connection cable is
required to connect a transceiver stick.

Connection cables (also commonly referred to as cordsets) have an M12 socket


at one end and the other end is free wires.

Extension cables (patchcords or interconnection cables) have one M12 plug at


each end. Use the cables to extend the length of the connection cables or the
cascading distance. Use only the M12 5-pin patchcords to connect a safety light
curtain directly to a GuardShield safety light curtain ArmorBlock® module.
Table 83 lists the required cables to connect a safety light curtain stick (cable
color black). Check https://www.rockwellautomation.com/products/
hardware/allen-bradley/connection-devices/cables-and-cordsets/dc-micro--
m12-/dc-micro-cordsets-and-patchcords.html for additional lengths and/or
cable jacket colors.
Table 83 - Unshielded Connection Cables (Cordsets and Patchcords)
Cat. No.
Description
M12 5-pin Socket (1) M12 8-pin Socket (1)
No connector (cordset) 889D-F5BC-x 889D-F8AB-x
M12 plug connector (patchcord) 889D-F5BCDM-x 889D-F8ABDM-x (2)
(1) x = 2 (2 m [6.6 ft]), 5 (5 m [16.4 ft]), 10 (10 m [32.8 ft]), 15 (15 m [49.2 ft]), 20 (20 m [65.6 ft]), or 30 (30 m [98.4 ft]) for the
desired length.
(2) Use this cable to extend the cable length between cascades.

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 179


Appendix A Specifications

IMPORTANT We highly recommend shielded cables for environments with high EMC
(electromagnetic disturbances) influences.
Figure 146 - Patchcord Cable

Figure 147 - M12 5-pin Plug Dimensions [mm (in.)]


47 (1.85)

14
(0.56)

180 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Appendix B

Typical Installations

Safety Light Curtain Figure 148 - Point of Operation Control (POC) and Parameter Access Control (PAC)
Mounted Vertically

Safety Light Curtain Figure 149 - Hazard Zone Safe Guard (Area Protection)
Mounted Horizontally

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 181


Appendix B Typical Installations

Fixed Blanking Application This application can include a sheet of metal that passes through the safety
light curtain before an operation is performed to form the material. The safety
light curtain permits the material at a specific width without causing the safety
outputs to turn off. Certain applications cannot be protected in any other way.
For example, if normal operation of a machine requires that material is
permanently fed into the dangerous part of a machine, then a portion of the
protective field is always interrupted, but the machine nevertheless continues
to operate. The protection with blanking must come from a detailed risk
analysis. Authorized personnel must confirm that in spite of blanking, the
safety of the machine operator is adequately accounted for. When necessary,
additional protective measures must be taken to shield the dangerous area. All
Blanking modes can create holes in the protective field. These holes must be
considered separately in the risk analysis.
Figure 150 - Schematic Application for Fixed Teach-in Blanking

A typical example of fixed Teach-in blanking is the exit ramp on an automatic


punch press. The punched part is transported out of the dangerous zone into a
container. The ramp passes through the protective field, and without blanking
would cause the machine to stop. The position of this ramp is monitored.
During a tool change, the position of this ramp can vary slightly. This new
position must be reconfigured in order for the application to run smoothly. It
is possible this new position needs reconfiguration in order for the application
to run smoothly.

182 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Appendix B Typical Installations

Cascading Application Figure 151 - Example for a Setup with Two Cascaded Segments (L-shape Setup)

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 183


Appendix B Typical Installations

Notes:

184 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Index

Numerics cable connection


cascading 89
1732 ArmorBlock receiver 87
wiring diagram 96 transmitter 87
450L-APR-BL-5 cascading 43, 46, 85
connection plug-in 56 application 183
450L-APR-ED-8 cable connection 89
connection plug-in 55 response time 51
450L-APR-MU-8 cascading plug-in 166
connection plug-in 57 certification 169
450L-APR-ON-5 safety 18
connection plug-in 55 change
450L-APR-UN-8 hardware 158
connection plug-in 59 characteristic
operating 165
clean
A optic front window 111
abbreviation 9 coding
accessories beam 27
optional 174 column
active lenses 23 mounting 177
advanced feature compatibility
response time 48 limitation 13
alignment compliance
laser 23 European Union directive 169
tool and bracket 178 concept
ANSI safety distance formula 63 safety 17
application configuration
cascading 183 download/upload 154
fixed blanking 182 system 53
approximate dimension 169 configuration option 143
ArmorBlock confirmation 59, 60
wiring diagram 96 new system configuration 59
assembly overview 13 Connected Component Workbench
automatic (re) start 25 troubleshoot 107
Connected Components Workbench
overview 115
B response time 51
connection
beam coding 27
EDM 90
beam status 129
external device monitoring 90
blanking 46 connection plug-in
fixed 143 450L-APR-BL-5 56
floating 149 450L-APR-ED-8 55
overview 140 450L-APR-MU-8 57
reduced resolution 28, 152 450L-APR-ON-5 55
resolution 34 450L-APR-UN-8 59
teach-in fixed 29 contents
teach-in procedure 30
package 14
blanking zones
corner mirror 175
teach 144
correct installation 70
bracket
correction 105
alignment 178
mounting 76
side mounting 78
button D
restart 91 default
automatic (re) start 25
determine
C safety distance 62
cable 179

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 185


Index

device four-sensor 41
export (zip file) 161 muting 41
diagnose window 127 four-sensor muting
dimension muting plug-in
approximate 169 wiring diagram 99
DIP switch setting schematic example 134
receiver plug-in 54 function
DIP switch setup 120 mute dependent override 36
direct to contactors safety 25
functional safety data 17
wiring diagram 93
directive
European Union compliance 169
disposal 111
G
distance general
reflective surface 66 protection 167
download setting 122
general purpose input output 124
configuration 154
general setup 120
GPIO 124
E selection 133
EDM 27 setting 133
GPIO selection 137
connection 90
electrical GPIO setting 137
protection 167 grounding 90
electrical installation 81 GSR SI safety relay
environmental 167 wiring diagram 94
error 105 GuardLink tap
error display wiring diagram 95
status indicator 103
error type 103 H
European safety distance formula 64
hardware 136
European Union directive
change 158
compliance 169 hardware setup 120
export 127, 159
horizontally
device (zip file) 161
project 159 mount 181
external device monitoring 27
connection 90
external error
I
status indicator 104 identification
external/system error 104 lens 140
import 159
project 160
F zip file 162
incorrect installation 70
firmware
inputs receiver
revision 16
update 163 plug-in 166
fixed blanking 143 inspection
application 182 regular 109
process details 145 install 68
rules 144 installation 61
setting 143 correct 70
teach-in 29 electrical 81
floating blanking 149 incorrect 70
object height 151 plug-in 82
rules 150 requirement 19
setting 150 typical 181
formula instruction
ANSI safety distance 63 safety 109
European safety distance 64 interference rejection 28
OSHA safety distance 63 interruption time
U.S. safety distance 62 short 51

186 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Index

K muting 34, 41
four-sensor schematic example 134
kit
lamp 35
replacement mounting 80 sensor 35
shock mounting 79 setting 131
standard top/bottom mounting 76 two-sensor
L-type 38
L-type with enable 39
L T-type 36
label two-sensor schematic example 130
plug-in 113 muting setting 136
product 52 muting type 131, 136
stick 112
lamp
muting 35 N
laser 129 new project
laser alignment 23 start 115
layout new system configuration 59
workbench 119 normal operation
lens identification 140 status indicator 102
lenses
active 23
limitation O
compatibility 13 object height
lock 128 floating blanking 151
lockout 105 reduced resolution blanking 153
low operating range 27 object number limited
L-type muting 38, 39 reduced resolution 32
off function
manual (re) start 26
M OID 106
maintenance 109 operating characteristic 165
manual 26 operating range
manual (re) start 26 low 27
operation 21
off function 26
manual cold start 26 optic front window
MDO 36 clean 111
optical interface device 106
mirror 67
corner 175 optical push button 103
misuse option
possible 19 configuration 143
mode 128 optional accessories 174
start 25 OSHA safety distance formula 63
monitoring OSSD 167
external device 27 output 91
mount 68 restart time 92
horizontally 181 signal processing 91
multiple GuardShield safety light curtain 72 output
vertically 181 OSSD 91
mounting status 167
replacement kit 80 overview
shock 79 assembly 13
mounting bracket 76 blanking 140
side 78 Connected Components Workbench 115
mounting column 177 product 11
multiple GuardShield safety light curtain
mount 72 P
multiple scan 50
package contents 14
multiple subconfigurations 115
mute dependent override 36

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 187


Index

plug-in 15, 81 restart time


cascading 166 OSSD 92
inputs receiver 166 revision
installation 82 firmware 16
label 113 rules
receiver 83, 167 fixed blanking 144
DIP switch setting 54 floating blanking 150
selection 172 reduced resolution blanking 153
transmitter 82
universal 166
possible misuse 19 S
power supply 89
safety
procedure
certification 18
teach-in blanking 30 concept 17
product label 52 function 25
product overview 11 instruction 109
product selection 171 rating 165
project standard 17
export 159 safety distance
import 160 determine 62
share 159 safety distance formula
start new 115 ANSI 63
project organizer 119 European 64
protection OSHA 63
electrical 167 U.S. 62
general 167 safety output 167
push button scan
optical 103 multiple 50
selection
alignment tool and bracket 178
R cable 179
rating corner mirror 175
mounting column 177
safety 165 optional accessories 174
receiver weld shield 179
cable connection 87 sensor
plug-in 83, 167 muting 35
receiver plug-in setting
DIP switch setting 54 fixed blanking 143
reduced resolution floating blanking 150
object number limited 32 reduced resolution blanking 152
reduced resolution blanking 152 setup
object height 153 DIP switch 120
rules 153 general 120
setting 152 hardware 120
reflective surface share
minimum distance 66 project 159
regular inspection 109 shield
replacement mounting kit 80 weld 179
requirement shock mounting kit 79
installation 19 short interruption time 51
reset 128 SI safety relay
resolution wiring diagram 94
blanking 34 side mounting bracket 78
reduced 28 signal processing
object number limited 32 OSSD 91
response time 46 specification 165
advanced feature 48 standard
cascading 51
Connected Components Workbench 51 response time 47
standard 47 safety 17
restart 26 standard top/bottom mounting kit 76
automatic 25 start 26
manual automatic 25
off function 26 manual
restart button 91
188 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024
Index

off function 26 update firmware 163


manual cold 26 upload
new project 115 configuration 154
start mode 25 USB status 121
status
beam 129
USB 121 V
status indicator 101, 104
vertically mount 181
error display 103
normal operation 102
status output 167
stick
W
label 112 weld shield 179
selection 171 window
Sub-configuration 121 diagnose 127
subconfiguration wiring 61
multiple 115 wiring diagram
system configuration 53 1732 ArmorBlock connection 96
system error direct to contactors 93
status indicator 104 four-sensor muting with muting plug-in 99
GSR SI safety relay 94
GuardLink tap connection 95
T t-connector 95
two-sensor muting with muting plug-in 98
t-connector typical 93
wiring diagram 95 workbench layout 119
teach 128
blanking zones 144
teach-in Z
fixed blanking 29 zip file
teach-in blanking export 161
procedure 30 import 162
terminology 9 zones 141
test pulse 92
time
response 46
short interruption 51
tool
alignment 178
top/bottom mounting kit 76
transmitter
cable connection 87
plug-in 82
troubleshoot 103
Connected Component Workbench 107
T-type muting 36
two-sensor 36, 38
L-type muting 38
L-type muting with enable 39
T-type muting 36
two-sensor muting
muting plug-in
wiring diagram 98
schematic example 130
two-sensor with enable 39
type
error 103
typical installation 181
typical wiring diagram 93

U
U.S. safety distance formula 62
universal plug-in 166

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 189


Index

Notes:

190 Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


GuardShield Safety Light Curtain User Manual

Rockwell Automation Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024 191


Rockwell Automation Support
Use these resources to access support information.
Technical Support Center Find help with how-to videos, FAQs, chat, user forums, and product notification updates. rok.auto/support
Knowledgebase Access Knowledgebase articles. rok.auto/knowledgebase
Local Technical Support Phone Numbers Locate the telephone number for your country. rok.auto/phonesupport
Literature Library Find installation instructions, manuals, brochures, and technical data publications. rok.auto/literature
Product Compatibility and Download Center Download firmware, associated files (such as AOP, EDS, and DTM), and access product rok.auto/pcdc
(PCDC) release notes.

Documentation Feedback
Your comments help us serve your documentation needs better. If you have any suggestions on how to improve our
content, complete the form at rok.auto/docfeedback.

Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)

At the end of life, this equipment should be collected separately from any unsorted municipal waste.

Rockwell Automation maintains current product environmental compliance information on its website at rok.auto/pec.

Allen-Bradley, ArmorBlock, Connected Components Workbench, ControlFLASH, ControlLogix, expanding human possibility, FactoryTalk, GuardLink, Guardmaster, GuardShield, Guard I/O, Rockwell
Automation, RSLinx, and Studio 5000 are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
CIP Safety, CIP Security, DeviceNet, and EtherNet/IP are trademarks of ODVA, Inc.
Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A.Ş. Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat:6 34752, İçerenköy, İstanbul, Tel: +90 (216) 5698400 EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur

Publication 450L-UM001G-EN-P - April 2024


Supersedes Publication 450L-UM001F-EN-P - March 2022 Copyright © 2024 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.

You might also like